RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_05)

8/11/2019 RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_05)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/rtn-910-idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0005 1/524

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System

V100R002C00

IDU Hardware Description

Issue 05

Date 2010-05-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.





Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice

The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the

customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the

purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations

of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the

preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and

recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang

Shenzhen 518129

People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 05 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com/





About This Document

Related Versions

The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 910 V100R002C00

iManager U2000 V100R001C00

Intended Audience

This document is intended for:

l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer

l Installation and commissioning engineer

l Field maintenance engineer

l Data configuration engineer

l System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:

l Basics of digital microwave communication

l Basics of the OptiX RTN 910

Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,

which if not avoided, will result in death or

serious injury.

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description About This Document



iii



Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level

of risk, which if not avoided, could result in

minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

which if not avoided, could result in

equipment damage, data loss, performance

degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a

problem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasize

or supplement important points of the main

text.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK .

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update History

Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all

updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 05 (2010-05-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

This document is the fifth release of the V100R002C00 version.

The updated contents are as follows.

Section Description

- Fixes known bugs.

About This Document

OptiX RTN 910


iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




This document is the fourth release of the V100R002C00 version.


Section Description

3 Boards l Represents the section "Functions and

Features" of each board by using tables.

l Provides description information and a

diagram for the Tx interface and Rx

interface of the SFP optical module in

section "Front Panel" of the CSHA/CSHB/

CSHC/EM6F board.

C Indicators, Weight, and Power

Consumption of Boards

Provides the weight of an empty chassis.

- Fixes known bugs.


This document is the third release of the V100R002C00 version.


Section Description

How to Learn About the IDU Based on This

Document

Adds descriptions of how to learn about IDUs

based on this document.

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card Modifies the sequence of high-order bits and

lower-order bits of DIP switches.

3.5.2 Functions and Features Deletes specifications for VC-4 loopbacks on

the IF1 board.

5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment Adds descriptions of requirements for the

diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable, types of

coaxial connectors, and crimp pliers.

- Fixes known bugs.


This document is the second release of the V100R002C00 version.


OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description About This Document



v



Section Description

D Glossary Adds certain terms.

E Acronyms and Abbreviations Adds certain abbreviations and acronyms.


This document is the first release of the V100R002C00 version.

About This Document

OptiX RTN 910


vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2

1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-31.3 Configuration Modes.......................................................................................................................................1-6

2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1

2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2

2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2

2.3 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-2

3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Board Appear ance...........................................................................................................................................3-3

3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4

3.3 CSTA...............................................................................................................................................................3-8

3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-9

3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-9

3.3.3 Wor king Principle................................................................................................................................3-13

3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-15

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-24

3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-27

3.3.7 Boar d Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-28

3.3.8 Boar d Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-28

3.3.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-283.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.....................................................................................................................................3-32

3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-32

3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-32

3.4.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-39

3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-43

3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-56

3.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-59

3.4.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-60

3.4.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-60

3.4.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-60

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description Contents



vii



3.5 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-65



3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-67

3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-72

3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-74

3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-75


3.6 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-77




3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-84

3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-87

3.6.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-87


3.7 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-90




3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-98

3.7.5 Valid Slot............................................................................................................................................3-100

3.7.6 Parameter Settings..............................................................................................................................3-1013.7.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-101

3.8 EM6T/EM6F...............................................................................................................................................3-103

3.8.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-104

3.8.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-104

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-107

3.8.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-110

3.8.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-114

3.8.6 Boar d Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-115

3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-115

3.8.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-115

3.9 SL1D...........................................................................................................................................................3-117

3.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-118

3.9.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-118

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-119

3.9.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-122

3.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-124

3.9.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-124

3.9.7 Parameter Settings..............................................................................................................................3-125

3.9.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-125

Contents

OptiX RTN 910


viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



3.10 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-126

3.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-127

3.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-127

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-128

3.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-130

3.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-134

3.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-134

3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-134

3.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-135

3.11 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-135

3.11.1 Ver sion Description..........................................................................................................................3-136


3.11.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-136

3.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1373.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-139


3.12 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-139

3.12.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-140


3.12.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-140

3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-142

3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-143


4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2

4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 4-4

4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-5

4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Power Ca ble.................................................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-35.2.1 IDU PG ND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-4

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable........................................................................................................................... 5-4

5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5

5.4 XPIC Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 5-6

5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7

5.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9

5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment .....................................................................................................5-9

5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel......................................................................................................................5-13

5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable...................................................................................................................................5-14

5.7 Orderwire Ca ble............................................................................................................................................5-16

OptiX RTN 910




ix



5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-17

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1

A.1 Parameters for NE Management....................................................................................................................A-3

A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching..................................................................................................A-3A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation....................................................................................................A-7

A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs.............................................................A-10

A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization............................................................................A-11

A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time..................................................A-13

A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management..................................................................A-14

A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs..............................................A-16

A.2 Parameters for Cable Management..............................................................................................................A-17

A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search..................................................................................................A-17

A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation...............................................................................................A-19

A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation.....................................................................................A-20

A.3 Parameters for Communications Management............................................................................................A-22

A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting.........................................................A-23

A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration..............................................A-24

A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.............A-25

A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC........................................A-27

A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management..........................................................................A-28

A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management..............................A-30

A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation................A-31

A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings..........................A-32

A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP......................................................................A-34

A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter............................................A-35

A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table...............................................................A-36

A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel...................................................................A-37

A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management............................................A-41

A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting.................................................................A-42

A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting..........................................................A-43

A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control............................................................................................A-44

A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control...................................................................................A-45A.4 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-46

A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-47

A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-51

A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-58

A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-59

A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-60

A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-62

A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-65

A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-76

A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-76

Contents

OptiX RTN 910


x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-79

A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-82

A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-83

A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-85

A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services

......................................................................................................................................................................A-88

A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-91

A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control..................................................................................A-93

A.7 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................A-96

A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table.........................................................................A-97

A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet............................................................A-99

A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality..........................................................A-102

A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...............................................A-105

A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status........................................A-106A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...............A-107

A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching....................................A-109

A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source......................A-110

A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status.....................................................................A-113

A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................A-114

A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation............................................................................A-115

A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service............................................................................................A-121

A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation...................................................A-126

A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation...........................................................................A-126

A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service...........................................................................................A-132

A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation...................................................................................A-144

A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters....................................................................................................................A-144

A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation.....................................................................A-145

A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management.....................................................................................A-147

A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation................................................A-153

A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration.......................................A-155

A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters..................................................A-155

A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters.....................................................A-161

A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST....................A-163

A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration...........................A-171

A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted........A-174

A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management...............................A-175

A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation...................A-176

A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management.........A-176

A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation

....................................................................................................................................................................A-178

A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics.......................................A-178

A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation........................A-180

A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority.................................................A-185

OptiX RTN 910




xi



A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation.....................................................................A-186

A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation...........................................................................A-187

A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM...........................................................................................................A-188

A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation....A-188

A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation

....................................................................................................................................................................A-189

A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation..............................A-190

A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation.................A-191

A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation................................A-192

A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling.................................A-193

A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling.................................A-194

A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter................................A-196

A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring..........A-199

A.11 QoS Parameters.......................................................................................................................................A-200A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management.................................................................A-201

A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create....................................................A-206

A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification..........................................A-211

A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management..................................................................................A-213

A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy................................................................................................A-218

A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration.....................................A-223

A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation........................................................A-232

A.12 RMON Parameters..................................................................................................................................A-233

A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.....................................................A-234

A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group........................................................A-235

A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group..........................................A-236

A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting......................................................A-237

A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-239

A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-239

A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-241

A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-242

A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-242

A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-243

A.14 Parameters f or Board Interfaces..............................................................................................................A-246A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute..........................................................................A-247

A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute....................................................................A-249

A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration........................................................................A-251

A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records......................................................................A-253

A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test................................................................................................A-254

A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute.............................................A-255

A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes.............................................................A-256

A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information...................................................A-261

A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes.......................................................A-262

A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-263

Contents

OptiX RTN 910


xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................A-265

A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-266

A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes........................................................A-268

A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control............................................................A-271

A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes....................................................A-272

A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes................................................A-276

A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes...................................................A-278

A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................A-279

A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes............................................A-281

A.15 Parameters for Overhead.........................................................................................................................A-283

A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead.................................................................A-284

A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs...............................................................................................A-284

A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs.............................................................................................A-286

B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1

C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards..................................................C-1

D Glossary.....................................................................................................................................D-1

E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1

OptiX RTN 910




xiii





Figures

Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910........................................1-2

Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910......................................1-3

Figure 1-3 IDU 910..............................................................................................................................................1-4

Figure 1-4 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6

Figure 1-5 Se parate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6

Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910........................................................................................................2-2

Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels..........................................................................................................2-4

Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)...................................................................................................................3-3

Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3

Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4

Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA............................................................................................3-13

Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-14

Figure 3-6 Fr ont panel of the CSTA..................................................................................................................3-16

Figure 3-7 Fr ont view of the RJ-45 connector...................................................................................................3-18Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface............................3-19

Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module.......................................................................................................3-22

Figure 3-10 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface........................................................................................3-22

Figure 3-11 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-25

Figure 3-12 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-27

Figure 3-13 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA...........................................................................3-27

Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram ..............................................................................................................3-40

Figure 3-15 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-42

Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHA................................................................................................................3-43

Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHB................................................................................................................3-44

Figure 3-18 Front panel of the CSHC................................................................................................................3-44

Figure 3-19 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-48

Figure 3-20 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface..........................3-49

Figure 3-21 Ports of the SFP optical module.....................................................................................................3-53

Figure 3-22 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface........................................................................................3-54

Figure 3-23 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-57

Figure 3-24 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis.....................................................................3-59

Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA...........................................................................3-59

Figure 3-26 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB...........................................................................3-59

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description Figures



xv



Figure 3-27 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC...........................................................................3-60

Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IF1.............................................................................................. 3-68

Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-72

Figure 3-30 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-74

Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1................................................................................3-74

Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram of the IFU2........................................................................................... 3-81

Figure 3-33 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-84

Figure 3-34 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-87

Figure 3-35 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2.............................................................................3-87

Figure 3-36 Functional block diagram of the IFX2........................................................................................... 3-94

Figure 3-37 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-98

Figure 3-38 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-100

Figure 3-39 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2...........................................................................3-101

Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram.............................................................................................................3-108

Figure 3-41 Front panel of the EM6T..............................................................................................................3-110

Figure 3-42 Front panel of the EM6F..............................................................................................................3-110

Figure 3-43 Ports of the SFP optical module...................................................................................................3-112

Figure 3-44 Front view of the RJ-45 connector...............................................................................................3-112

Figure 3-45 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-114

Figure 3-46 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F..............................................................3-114

Figure 3-47 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-120

Figure 3-48 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-122

Figure 3-49 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-124Figure 3-50 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D..........................................................................3-124

Figure 3-51 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-128

Figure 3-52 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-130

Figure 3-53 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-130

Figure 3-54 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-132

Figure 3-55 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis.........................................................................3-134

Figure 3-56 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910.............................................................................3-134

Figure 3-57 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-137

Figure 3-58 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-137

Figure 3-59 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis..............................................................................................3-139

Figure 3-60 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU................................................................................3-139

Figure 3-61 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-141

Figure 3-62 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-142

Figure 3-63 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-143

Figure 3-64 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN...............................................................................3-143

Figure 4-1 Fr ont panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2

Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3

Figure 4-3 Fr ont panel of the PDU.......................................................................................................................4-4

Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU................................................................................................4-6

Figures

OptiX RTN 910


xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode ....................................................................................4-7

Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode .....................................................................................4-7

Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3

Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4

Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5

Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6

Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7

Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-8

Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9

Figure 5-9 E1 cable............................................................................................................................................5-10

Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel..............................................................................5-13

Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors.............................................5-15

Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable..............................................................................................................................5-17

Figure 5-13 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-19

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description Figures



xvii





Tables

Table 1-1 Intr oduction of the IDU 910.................................................................................................................1-3

Table 1-2 RT N 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910.............................................................................1-4

Table 1-3 RT N XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910..........................................................................1-5

Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910.........................................................................................1-7

Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3

Table 3-1 List of the IDU boards..........................................................................................................................3-4

Table 3-2 Functions and features of the CSTA....................................................................................................3-9

Table 3-3 SDH service processing function of the CSTA..................................................................................3-11

Table 3-4 PDH service processing function of the CSTA..................................................................................3-12

Table 3-5 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................3-16

Table 3-6 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.................................................. 3-17

Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface...................................................................................... 3-18

Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the EXT interface................................................................................................. 3-18

Table 3-9 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..................................................................3-19Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface......................................................................................3-20

Table 3-11 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface..............................................................................................3-21

Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface................................................................................3-21

Table 3-13 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-21

Table 3-14 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA..........................................................................3-22

Table 3-15 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-23

Table 3-16 Setting the DIP switches.................................................................................................................. 3-25

Table 3-17 Board feature code of the CSTA......................................................................................................3-28

Table 3-18 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-28

Table 3-19 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-29

Table 3-20 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-29

Table 3-21 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-30

Table 3-22 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-30

Table 3-23 Clock timing and synchronization performance.............................................................................. 3-31

Table 3-24 Wayside service interface performance........................................................................................... 3-31

Table 3-25 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-31

Table 3-26 Functions and features of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.........................................................................3-33

Table 3-27 Ethernet service processing function of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.................................................. 3-35

Table 3-28 SDH service processing function of the CSHC............................................................................... 3-38

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description Tables



xix



Table 3-29 PDH service processing function of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC........................................................3-39

Table 3-30 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB..........................................................................3-44

Table 3-31 Description of the indicators on the CSHC......................................................................................3-45

Table 3-32 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces................................................3-47

Table 3-33 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface....................................................................................3-48

Table 3-34 Pin assignment of the EXT interface...............................................................................................3-48

Table 3-35 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector................................................................3-49

Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface......................................................................................3-50

Table 3-37 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface..............................................................................................3-51

Table 3-38 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface................................................................................3-51

Table 3-39 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-51

Table 3-40 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB..............................................................3-52

Table 3-41 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC..........................................................................3-52

Table 3-42 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-53

Table 3-43 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode.................................................................3-53

Table 3-44 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-54

Table 3-45 Setting the DIP switches..................................................................................................................3-57

Table 3-46 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC..............................................................................3-60

Table 3-47 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-61

Table 3-48 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-61

Table 3-49 FE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-62

Table 3-50 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-62

Table 3-51 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-63Table 3-52 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-63

Table 3-53 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-63

Table 3-54 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-64

Table 3-55 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-64

Table 3-56 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-64

Table 3-57 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-65

Table 3-58 Functions and features of the IF1.....................................................................................................3-66

Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1...............................................................3-68

Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1.............................................................3-71

Table 3-61 Description of the indicators on the IF1...........................................................................................3-72

Table 3-62 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-73

Table 3-63 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-75

Table 3-64 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)..............................................................................3-75

Table 3-65 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-76

Table 3-66 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-76

Table 3-67 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-77

Table 3-68 Functions and features of the IFU2..................................................................................................3-78

Table 3-69 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2............................................................3-82

Table 3-70 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2..........................................................3-83

Tables

OptiX RTN 910


xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table 3-71 Description of the indicators on the IFU2........................................................................................3-85

Table 3-72 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-86

Table 3-73 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-87

Table 3-74 Hybrid microwave work modes (IFU2 board).................................................................................3-88

Table 3-75 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-89

Table 3-76 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-89

Table 3-77 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-90

Table 3-78 Functions and features of the IFX2..................................................................................................3-91

Table 3-79 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2............................................................3-95

Table 3-80 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2..........................................................3-97

Table 3-81 Description of the indicators on the IFX2........................................................................................3-98

Table 3-82 Description of the interfaces..........................................................................................................3-100

Table 3-83 Slot allocation ................................................................................................................................3-101

Table 3-84 Hybrid microwave work modes (IFX2 board)...............................................................................3-102

Table 3-85 IF performance...............................................................................................................................3-102

Table 3-86 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...............................................................3-103

Table 3-87 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-103

Table 3-88 Functions and features of the EM6T/EM6F...................................................................................3-104

Table 3-89 Signal processing flow in the receive direction.............................................................................3-108

Table 3-90 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction............................................................................3-109

Table 3-91 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................3-110

Table 3-92 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F.........................................................................3-112

Table 3-93 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode...................................................................3-113Table 3-94 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode...............................................................3-113

Table 3-95 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..............................................................3-114

Table 3-96 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-115

Table 3-97 Board feature code of the EM6F....................................................................................................3-115

Table 3-98 Performance of the GE optical interface .......................................................................................3-116

Table 3-99 GE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-116

Table 3-100 FE electric interface performance................................................................................................3-117

Table 3-101 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-117

Table 3-102 Functions and features of the SL1D.............................................................................................3-118

Table 3-103 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D.......................................................3-120

Table 3-104 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D.....................................................3-121

Table 3-105 Description of the indicators on the SL1D...................................................................................3-122

Table 3-106 Description of the interfaces .......................................................................................................3-123

Table 3-107 Slot allocation for the SL1D........................................................................................................3-124

Table 3-108 Board feature code of the SL1D...................................................................................................3-125

Table 3-109 STM-1 optical interface performance..........................................................................................3-125

Table 3-110 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-126

Table 3-111 Functions and features of the SP3S/SP3D...................................................................................3-127

Table 3-112 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D.............................................3-128

OptiX RTN 910




xxi



Table 3-113 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D...........................................3-129

Table 3-114 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................3-130

Table 3-115 Description of the interface on the SP3S.....................................................................................3-131

Table 3-116 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D...................................................................................3-131

Table 3-117 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-132

Table 3-118 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-134

Table 3-119 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-134

Table 3-120 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-135

Table 3-121 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-135

Table 3-122 Functions and features of the PIU................................................................................................3-136

Table 3-123 Description of the power status indicators ..................................................................................3-138

Table 3-124 Description of the interfaces on the PIU......................................................................................3-138

Table 3-125 Technical specifications...............................................................................................................3-139

Table 3-126 Functions and features of the FAN..............................................................................................3-140

Table 3-127 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-141

Table 3-128 Description of the fan status indicators........................................................................................3-142

Table 3-129 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-143

Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2

Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3

Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU..........................................................................................................................4-5

Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable.........................................................................................................5-3

Table 5-2 Ty pes of fiber jumpers................................................................................................ .........................5-7

Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-10Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12

Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel............................5-14

Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors..........5-15

Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable...............................................................................................5-17

Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface.................................................................................................5-17

Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface.............................................................................................5-18

Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable...................................................................................5-19

Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable.............................................................................................5-19

Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-275

Table A-2 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-280

Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards........................................................B-1

Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................C-1

Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB............................................................................C-2

Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC........................................................................................C-3

Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1.............................................................................................C-5

Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2..........................................................................................C-6

Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.............................................................................C-7

Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.........................................................................................C-9

Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D................................................................................C-9

Tables

OptiX RTN 910


xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX........................................................................................C-10

Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators ....................................................................................C-10

Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators..........................................................................................C-11

Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards.....................................................................................C-11

OptiX RTN 910




xxiii





1 Introduction

About This Chapter

The OptiX RTN 910 is one of the series products of the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission

system.

1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by

Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication

network or pr ivate network.

1.2 Components

The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910 and the ODU.

An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.

1.3 Configur ation Modes

The OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring different

control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements of different

microwave a pplication scenarios.

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction



1-1



1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by

Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication

network or private network.

The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in two types: OptiX RTN 910 and OptiX RTN 950.

The users can choose an appropriate type based on the actual requirements.

l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.

l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.

The OptiX RTN 910 provides several types of service interfaces and facilitates installation and

flexible configuration. It can provide a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave,

Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports the

smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybridmicrowave to the Packet microwave. The solution can evolve based on the service changes that

occur due to radio mobile network evolution. Thus, this solution can meet the transmission

requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks.

Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the TDM microwave transmission solution and the Hybrid

microwave transmission solution respectively that are provided by the OptiX RTN 910 for the

mobile communication network.

Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910

OptiX RTN 910 BTS BSC

E1

E1

E1

STM-1/E1 E1Regional Backhaul

Network

E1 E1

E1

E1

E1

E1

1 Introduction

OptiX RTN 910


1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910

Regional Backhaul

Network

OptiX RTN 910 BTSNodeB BSCRNC

FE

E1

FE

E1

E1

E1

FE

FE/GE

STM-1/E1

GE

E1

E1

STM-1/

E1

FE

NOTE

l In the solutions, the local backhaul network is optional. The OptiX RTN 910 can be connected to the RNC

or the BSC directly.

l When the OptiX RTN 910 supports the microwaves in three directions or more, you can adopt the NE

cascading mode or use the OptiX RTN 950, which is more powerful.

1.2 Components

The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910 and the ODU.

An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.

IDU 910

The IDU 910 is the indoor unit of an OptiX RTN 910 system. It accesses services, performs

multiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control and

communication function.

Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 910.

Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910

Item Performance

Chassis height 1U

Pluggable Supported

OptiX RTN 910




1-3



Item Performance

Number of microwave

directions

1-2

RF configuration mode 1+0 non-protection configuration

2+0 non-protection configuration

1+1 protection configuration

N+1 protection configuration (N = 1)

XPIC configuration

Figure 1-3 IDU 910

ODU

The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 900. It performs frequency conversion and

amplification of signals.

The OptiX RTN 900 series products can uses the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering

6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band.

NOTE

Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz

frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910

Item Description

Standard PowerODU

High Power ODU Low Capacity forPDH ODU

ODU type SP, SPA HP LP

1 Introduction

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Item Description

Standard PowerODU

High Power ODU Low Capacity forPDH ODU

Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz (SP

ODU)

6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2

3 GHz (SPA ODU)

7/8/10/10.5/11/13/15/18/23/26/28/32/38

GHz

7/8/11/13/15/18/23GHz

Microwave

modulation mode

QPSK/16QAM/

32QAM/64QAM/

128QAM/256QAM

(SP)

QPSK/16QAM/

32QAM/64QAM/128QAM (SPA)

QPSK/16QAM/

32QAM/64QAM/

128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910

Item Description

High Power ODU Low Capacity for PDHODU

ODU type XMC-2 XMC-1

Frequency band 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz

Microwave modulation

mode

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/

64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channel spacing 7/14/28/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

The OptiX RTN 910 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-

polarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the

corresponding feeder system.

There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate

mounting.

l The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and single-

polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the

ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one

antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must

be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-4 shows the direct mounting

method.

OptiX RTN 910




1-5



Figure 1-4 Direct mounting

l The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameter

and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-5 shows the separate method. In this

situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom.

Figure 1-5 Separate mounting

1.3 Configuration Modes

The OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring different

control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements of different

microwave application scenarios.

1 Introduction

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910

ConfigurationModes

Type of theControl,Switching,

and Timing Board

Type of the IFBoard

Type of theODU

MainApplication

PDH

microwave

equipment

CSTA IF1 Low capacity

for PDH ODU

Providing a

radio link whose

capacity is not

higher than

16xE1

SDH

microwave

equipment

CSTA IF1 Standard power

ODU or high

power ODU

Providing an

STM-1 radio

link or a high-

capacity PDHradio link

Hybrid

microwave

equipment

CSHA/CSHB/

CSHC

IFU2 Standard power

ODU or high

power ODU

Providing a

Hybrid radio

link

XPIC Hybrid

microwave

equipment

CSHA/CSHB/

CSHC

IFX2 Standard power

ODU or high

power ODU

Providing a

Hybrid radio

link of the super

capacity

OptiX RTN 910




1-7





2 Chassis

About This Chapter

The IDU of OptiX RTN 910 is a 1U chassis. It supports various installation modes and therefore

can be deployed flexibly.

2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). The

IDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling.

2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly.

2.3 IDU Labels

There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection

label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation

warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar

with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,

thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis



2-1



2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). The

IDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling.

Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 910.

Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910

2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly.

The IDU 910 can be installed:

l In a 300 mm ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) cabinet

l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet

l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In an open rack

l On a wall

l On a table

2.3 IDU Labels

There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection

label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation

warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar

with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.

2 Chassis

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Label Description

Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU

chassis. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and

boards.

Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Description

ESD protection

label

Indicates that the

equipment is

sensitive to static

electricity.

Grounding label Indicates the

grounding position

of the IDU chassis.

Fan warning

label

warns you not to

touch the fan leaves

when the fan is

rotating.

High

temperature

warning label

The board surface

temperature may

exceed 70°C when

the ambient

temperature is

higher than 55°C. Inthis case, you need

to wear protective

gloves before

handling the board.

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE INCHINAHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

Qualification

card label

Indicates that the

equipment is

qualified.

RoHS label Indicates that the

equipmentcomplies with the

related

requirements

specified in the

RoHS directive.

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis



2-3



Label Label Name Description

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.

OptiX RTN 910

POWER RATING: -48

-60V;5A

华为技术有限公司国制造

电源额定值

HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA

N 14036

Product

nameplate label

Indicates the

product name and

certification.

PULL

Operation

guidance label

The switch lever

must be pulled

outwards slightly

before setting the

switch to the "I" or

"O" position.

Label Position

Figure 2-2 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 910.

Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels

合格证/QUALIFICATIONCARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADEINCHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIESCO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

OptiX RTN 910

华为技术有限公司国制造

电源额定值

H UA WE I TE CH NO LG IE S CO . ,L TD . M AD E IN C H I NA

N 14036

Class 1 Laser Product

WARNING

-48VOUTPUTTURN OFFPOWER BEFORE

DISCONNECTINGIF CABLE

!

ThisdevicecomplieswithPart15oftheFCCRules.Operationissubjecttothefollowingtwoconditions:(1)thisdevicemaynotcauseharmfulinterference,and(2)thisdevicemustacceptanyinterferencereceived,includinginterferencethatmaycauseundesiredoperation.

POWER RATING: -48 -60V;5A

2 Chassis

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



3 Boards

About This Chapter

The IDU 910 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing

board, IF board, Ethernet board, SDH board, PDH board, power supply board, and fan board.

3.1 Board Ap pearance

The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height)

x 225.80 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect

unit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 20.60 mm (height) x 266.79 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm

(width).

3.2 Board ListThe boards ar e inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housing

different types of boards.

3.3 CSTA

The CSTA is an TDM system control, switching, and timing board.

3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication,

switching, and clock board. The diff erences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are with

regard to the types and number of service interfaces.

3.5 IF1

The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distributionmodes.

3.6 IFU2

The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and

Packet microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I power

distribution mode.

3.7 IFX2

The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave

and Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.8 EM6T/EM6F

The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces andtwo GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards



3-1



follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE

interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or

electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible

with the FE electrical interfaces.

3.9 SL1DThe SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.

3.10 SP3S/SP3D

The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm

tributary board.

3.11 PIU

The PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

3.12 FAN

The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height)

x 225.80 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect

unit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 20.60 mm (height) x 266.79 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm

(width).

NOTE

The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.

Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of the boards in the IDU 910 chassis.

Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)

The appearance of the IFU2 is provided as an example. The front panel of the IFU2 has two

ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers are used when the IFU2 is inserted or

removed. The captive screws are used to fasten the IFU2. The bar code of the IFU2 is attached

to one of the two ejector levers. Figure 3-2 shows the bar code of the IFU2.

Figure 3-2 Bar code

Bar code

②

Internal code

③

④

Board version

Board name

Board feature code

①

0514721055000015-SL91SL1D01

① ② ③ ④

OptiX RTN 910




3-3



NOTE

The indication of the board feature code is related to the board type. The feature code of an optical interface

board indicates the type of the optical interface on the board. The feature code of an E1 interface board

indicates the impedance of the E1 interface on the board. For details about the board feature code, see the

description of each board in this document.

3.2 Board List

The boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housing

different types of boards.

Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout

Slot

6

(FAN)

Slot

5

(PIU) Slot 1 (CSTA/CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)

Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)

NOTE

The EXT represents an extended slot, which can be inserted with various IF boards and interface boards.

Table 3-1 List of the IDU boards

BoardName

FullSpelling Valid Slot Description

CSTA TDM

control,switching,

and timing

board

Slot 1 l Provides full timeslot cross-connections

for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalentto 8x8 VC-4s.

l Performs system communication and

control.

l Provides the clock processing function and

supports one external clock input/output

function.

l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1

interfaces.

l Uses the SFP module to provide two

STM-1 optical interfaces.l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one

NM serial interface, and one NE cascading

interface.

l Provides one orderwire interface, one

asynchronous data interface, and three-

input and one-output external alarm

interfaces.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



BoardName


CSHA Hybrid

control,

switching,

and timing

board


for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent

to 8x8 VC-4s.

l Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching

capability.


control.



function.


interfaces.

l Provides two FE electrical interfaces.

l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that

are compatible with the FE electrical

interface.

l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one


interface.




interfaces.

OptiX RTN 910




3-5



BoardName


CSHB Hybrid

control,

switching,

and timing

board



to 8x8 VC-4s.


capability.


control.



function.

l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm

E1 interfaces.


l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that

are compatible with the FE electrical

interface.



interface.




interfaces.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



BoardName


CSHC Hybrid

control,

switching,

and timing

board



to 8x8 VC-4s.


capability.


control.



function.


interfaces.

l Uses the SFP module to provide two

STM-1 optical interfaces.


l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE

optical or electrical interfaces. The GE

electrical interfaces are compatible with

the FE electrical interfaces.



interface.

l Provides one orderwire interface, oneasynchronous data interface, and three-


interfaces.

IF1 SDH IF

board

Slot 3/4 l Provides one IF interface.

l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave

solution and the STM-1-based SDH

microwave solution.

IFU2 Universal IF

board


l Supports the Hybrid microwave solution.

l Supports AM.

IFX2 Universal

XPIC IF

board


l Supports the XPIC function of the Hybrid

microwave.

l Supports the AM of the Hybrid

microwave.

SL1D 2xSTM-1

interface

board

Slot 3/4 Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1

optical interfaces.

OptiX RTN 910




3-7



BoardName


EM6T 6 Port RJ45

Ethernet/

Gigabit

Ethernet

Interface

Board

Slot 3/4 l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

l Provides two GE electrical interfaces thatare compatible with the FE electrical

interface.

EM6F 4 Port RJ45 +

2 Port SFP

Fast

Ethernet/

Gigabit

Ethernet

Interface

Board

Slot 3/4 l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE

optical or electrical interfaces. The GE

electrical interfaces are compatible with

the FE electrical interfaces.

SP3S 16xE1

tributary

board

Slot 3/4 Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1

interfaces.

SP3D 32xE1

tributary

board

Slot 3/4 Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1

interfaces.

TNC1PIU Power board Slot 5 Provides two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.

TNC1FAN Fan board Slot 6 Cools and ventilates the IDU.

3.3 CSTA

The CSTA is an TDM system control, switching, and timing board.

3.3.1 Version Description

The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.

3.3.2 Functions and Features

The CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,

and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces,

auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.

3.3.3 Working Principle

The CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,

service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.

3.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, service interfaces, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons,

and labels on the front panel.

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF CardThis board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary

slots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also

allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional unit

on the CSTA.

3.3.7 Board Feature Code

The E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the bar

code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.

3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.

3.3.9 Technical Specifications

This topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDH

optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface

performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.


The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.


The CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,

and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces,

auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.

Table 3-2 to Table 3-4 provide the functions and features of the CSTA.

Table 3-2 Functions and features of the CSTA

Function and Feature Board

CSTA

Basic functions Cross-connect

capacity

Supports time division cross-connections at the VC-12,

VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are equivalent to 8x8

VC-4s.

System control

and

communication

Manages, monitors, and controls the running state of

the IDU, and works as a communication service unit

between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to

control and manage the NE.

Clock Clock

synchronization

at the physical

layer

Tracks the clock source and provides the system clock

and the frame headers of service signals and overhead

signals for the other boards.

The clock sources that can be tracked are as follows:

l External clock

l SDH line clock

l PDH tributary clock

l Clock at the air interface

OptiX RTN 910




3-9




CSTA

Clock

protection

l Protection by setting the priorities of clock sources

l Protection by using the SSM protocol

l Protection by using the extended SSM protocol

DCN Outband DCN Supports a maximum of seven DCCs.

SDH service

processing

See Table 3-3.

PDH service

processing

See Table 3-4.

Auxiliary

interfaces andmanagement

interfaces

Ethernet NM

interface

1

NM serial

interface

1

NE cascading

interface

1

Orderwire

phone interface

1

Asynchronous

data interface

The CSTA provides one asynchronous data interface.

The transmission rate at the interface is equal to or less

than 19.2 kbit/s and the RSL at the interface complieswith the RS-232 standard.

Synchronous

data interface

The CSTA provides one synchronous data interface.

The transmission rate at the interface is 64 kbit/s and

the specifications of the interface comply with ITU-T

G.703.

External alarm

interface

Three inputs and one output

OM Warm resets and

cold resets

Supported

In-service

loading of the

FPGA

Supported

Query of the

manufacturing

information

about the board

Supported

Detection of the

temperature of

the board

Supported

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




CSTA

Detection of the

voltage of the board

Supported

Detection of the

indicators of the

other boards

Supported

Insertion and

removal of the

CF card

Supported

Table 3-3 describes the SDH service processing function of the CSTA.

Table 3-3 SDH service processing function of the CSTA


CSTA

Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical

interfaces

Adopts the SFP optical module and supports the optical

interfaces of the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.

The characteristics of all the optical interfaces comply

with ITU-T G.957.

Protection Linear MSP Supported

SNCP Supported

Clock Clock source Each SDH line port provides one line clock signal.

Clock

protection




DCN Outband DCN Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is

composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or

twelve DCC bytes.

OM Loopback l Supports inloops at optical interfaces.

l Supports outloops at optical interfaces.

l Supports outloops on VC-4 paths.

l Supports inloops on VC-4 paths.

OptiX RTN 910




3-11




CSTA

Setting of the

on/off state of alaser

Supported

Automatic laser

shutdown

(ALS) functiona

Supported

Detection and

query of the

information

about the SFP

optical module

Supported

Warm resets and

cold resets

Supported

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500

ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down.

l The laser changes to launch only intermittent laser pulses. The laser emits light for two seconds and

shuts down for 60 seconds.l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser is recovered to normal and continuously emits light.

Table 3-4 describes the PDH service processing function of the CSTA.

Table 3-4 PDH service processing function of the CSTA


CSTA

Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals.

Specificationsof the interfaces

75-ohm/120-ohm E1

interface

16

Clock Clock source Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as

the tributary clock source.

Clock

protection

Protection by setting the priorities of clock sources

E1 retiming

function

Supported

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




CSTA

OM Loopback l Supports inloops at E1 tributary ports.

l Supports outloops at E1 tributary ports.

Warm resets and

cold resets

Supported

PRBS tests at E1

ports

Supported


The CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,

service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA

Backplane

System control

and

communicatio

n unit

Cross-connect

unit

External alarminterface

Clock unit Clock signal

provided to other

boards

External clock signalClock interface

STM-1

signal

processing

unit

E1 signalprocessing

unit

VC-4

signal

VC-4

signalE1 signal

SDH signal

Control bus

VC-4 signal

Asynchronous

data interface

Synchronous

data interface

Orderwire

interface

Auxiliaryinterface

u

nit Clock signal

provided to the

other units on

the board

NM interface

NM serial interface

NE cascade

interface

Clock sourcereceived from

the service unit

on the board

Power

supply

unit

-48 V1

-48 V2

Supplies power to

the other units on

the board

+12 V power

supplied to the fans

+3.3 V power supplied

to other boards

Clock signal

received from

other boards

TDM service board

OptiX RTN 910




3-13



System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The

system control and communication unit performs the following functions:

l Controls and manages the other units on the CSTA, and also collects alarms and performance events through the control bus.

l Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance

events through the control bus.

l Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the

control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM on the IF board.

l Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.

l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE

cascade interface.

l The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the

software.

l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads

the FPGA software.

l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU

unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:

– Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.

– Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services.

– Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between

different lines.

Cross-Connect Unit

The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order cross-

connect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block

diagram of the cross-connect unit.

Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit

Source TDM

service unit

HOXC

LOXC

Sink TDMservice unit

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA

C S

T A

S T A T

P R O G

S Y N C

S R V

CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE

E1

1~16 L O S 1 L O S 2

1 2 3 4 5

1 2

STM-1

1. Indicators 2. Buttons 3. Auxiliary interfaces and

management interfaces

4. STM-1 optical interfaces 5. E1 (1-16) interface

Indicators

Table 3-5 Description of the indicators on the CSTA

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working normally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l

The board is not created.l There is no power supplied to the

board.

PROG On for 100 ms (green) and

off for 100 ms repeatedly

When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the software is being loaded.

On for 300 ms (green) and



being reset, the board software is in

BIOS boot state.

On (green) The upper layer software is being

initialized.

On for 100 ms (red) and off

for 100 ms repeatedly


being reset, the BOOTROM self-check

fails.

On (red) When the board is being powered or

being reset, the memory self-check fails

or loading upper layer software fails.

When the board is running, the logic file

or upper layer software is lost.

The pluggable storage card is faulty.

Off The software is running normally.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.

On (red) The clock source is lost or is switched.

SRV On (green) The system is working normally.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs on the

board.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface on the line

reports the R_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical interface on the line does

not report the R_LOS alarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface on the line


Off The second optical interface on the line

does not report the R_LOS alarm.

Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces

Table 3-6 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces

Interface Description Connector Type

NMS/COM NM interface/NM serial interface

RJ-45

EXT NE cascade interface

CLK/TOD External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or

2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface

F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data interfaceALMI/ALMO Alarm input/output interface

PHONE Orderwire interface

CF RCV CF configuration reset button -

RST Board warm reset button -

OptiX RTN 910




3-17



NOTE

l The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface can

transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data service

overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clock

interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.

l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,

however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent

transmission of the orderwire byte.

The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments

of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ-45 connector.

Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface

Interface Pin Signal

NMS/COM

1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (-)

3 Receiving data (+)

4 Grounding end of the NM serial

interface

5 Receive end of the NM serial interface

6 Receiving data (-)

7 Not defined

8 Transmit end of the NM serialinterface

Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the EXT interface


EXT




3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined

NOTE

The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data

through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see

Table 3-9.

Table 3-9 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector


LINK (green) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

ACT (yellow) On or blinking The interface is transmitting or

receiving data.

Off The interface is not transmitting or

receiving data.

NOTE

The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no

external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,

an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed

on the NEs.

Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.

Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface

C S T A

S T A T

P R O G

S Y N C

S R V

CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ ALMO PHONE

E11~16 C

R I T

M A J

M I N

M A J

L O S 1

L O S 2

C S T A

S T A T

P R O G

S Y N C

S R V

CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ ALMO PHONE

E11~16

C R I T

M A J

M I N

M A J

L O S 1

L O S 2

LAN

The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the

same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is providedin Table 3-10.

OptiX RTN 910




3-19



NOTE

Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not

used in this product version.

Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface

Pin Working Mode

External Clock

ExternalTime Input

(1 PPS +TimeInformation)

External TimeOutput

(1 PPS + TimeInformation)

ExternalTime Input

(DCLS)

External TimeOutput

(DCLS)

1 CLK

receivin

g (-)

Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

2 CLK

receivin

g (+)


3 Not

defined

1 PPS signal

input (-)

(RS-422

level)

1 PPS signal

output (-)

(RS-422 level)

DCLS time

signal input (-)

(RS-422 level)

DCLS time

signal output (-)

(RS-422 level)

4 CLK

transmitting (-)

Grounding

end

Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end

5 CLK

transmit

ting (+)

Grounding

end


6 Not

defined

1 PPS signal

input (+)

(RS-422

level)

1 PPS signal

output (+)

(RS-422 level)

DCLS time

signal input (+)

(RS-422 level)

DCLS time

signal output (+)

(RS-422 level)

7 Not

defined

Time

information

input (-)

(RS-422

level)

Time

information

output (-)

(RS-422 level)

Not defined Not defined

8 Not

defined

Time

information

input (+)

(RS-422

level)

Time

information

output (+)

(RS-422 level)


3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-11.

Table 3-11 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface


F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals

2 Grounding end

3 Receiving asynchronous data signals

4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)

5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)

6 Grounding end

7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)

8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-12.

Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface


ALMI/ALMO

1 The first external alarm input signal

2 Grounding end for the first alarm input signal

3 The second external alarm input signal

4 The third external alarm input signal

5 Grounding end for the third alarm input signal

6 Grounding end for the second alarm input signal

7 The first external alarm output signal (+)

8 The first external alarm output signal (-)

The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-13.

Table 3-13 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface


PHONE 1 Not defined

2

OptiX RTN 910




3-21




3

4 RING

5 TIP

6 Not defined

7

8

Service Interfaces

Table 3-14 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA


STM-1 (1) The first STM-1 optical

interface

LC (the SFP optical module)

STM-1 (2) The second STM-1 optical

interface

E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1

signals

Anea 96

The STM-1 optical interface uses the SFP optical module. One SFP optical module provides

one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-9, in which TX represents the transmit

port and RX represents the receive port.

Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module

TX RX

The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96interface is provided in Figure 3-10 and Table 3-15.

Figure 3-10 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface

POS.96

POS.1

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table 3-15 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 The first received E1

differential signal (+)

25 The first transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)


differential signal (-)


signal (-)

3 The second received E1


27 The second transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)




signal (-)

5 The third received E1differential signal (+)

29 The third transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

6 The third received E1


30 The third transmitted E1 differential

signal (-)

7 The fourth received E1


31 The fourth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)




signal (-)

9 The fifth received E1


33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)




signal (-)

11 The sixth received E1


35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)




signal (-)

13 The seventh received E1


37 The seventh transmitted E1






15 The eighth received E1


39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)




signal (-)

17 The ninth received E1


41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

OptiX RTN 910




3-23







signal (-)

19 The tenth received E1differential signal (+)

43 The tenth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

20 The tenth received E1


44 The tenth transmitted E1 differential

signal (-)

21 The eleventh received E1


45 The eleventh transmitted E1






23 The twelfth received E1


47 The twelfth transmitted E1






49 The thirteenth received E1


73 The thirteenth transmitted E1






51 The fourteenth received E1


75 The fourteenth transmitted E1






53 The fifteenth received E1


77 The fifteenth transmitted E1






55 The sixteenth received E1


79 The sixteenth transmitted E1


56 The sixteenth received E1differential signal (-)

80 The sixteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.

The CF card stores the following information:

l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data

l NE software and all the board software programs

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



l All the FPGA files

l License file for microwave link capability

Figure 3-11 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

O N

D I P

1

2

3

4

2

1

1. DIP switches 2. CF card

Table 3-16 Setting the DIP switches

Setting the DIP Switchesa Function

1 2 3 4

0 0 0 0 Normal

operating state

when the

watchdog is

enabled.

0 0 0 1 Reserved.

0 0 1 0 Memory self-

check state.

0 0 1 1 Commissioning

state.

OptiX RTN 910




3-25




1 2 3 4

0 1 0 0 Operating state

when the

watchdog is

disabled and the

full memory

check is

performed.

0 1 0 1 BIOS holdover

state.

0 1 1 0 BIOS exhibition

state.

0 1 1 1 Reserved (by

default,

operating state

when the

watchdog is

started).


default,

operating state

when the

watchdog is

started).

1 0 0 1 To recover the

data of the CF

card.

1 0 1 0 To erase the data

in the system

parameter area.

1 0 1 1 To erase the

databases.

1 1 0 0 To erase the NE

software,

including the

patches.


databases and

NE software

(including the

patches).

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




1 2 3 4

1 1 1 0 To format the

file system, that

is, to erase all

the data in the

file system.


file system so

that all the data

is erased (file

system +

extended BIOS

+ system

parameter area).

NOTE

a: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is

turned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.

3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary

slots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are alsoallocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional unit

on the CSTA.

Figure 3-12 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1 (CSTA)


According to the functional units, the CSTA is mapped into the logical system control and

communication board (CSTA), logical auxiliary and management board (AUX), and logical

service boards (SL1D and SP3S) on the NMS.

Figure 3-13 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot 1 (CSTA)


Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

OptiX RTN 910




3-27




The E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the bar

code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.

Table 3-17 Board feature code of the CSTA

Board Feature Code Interface Impedance (Ohm)

A 120

B 75


This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.

Related References

A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status

A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General

A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port

A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port

A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface


This topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDH

optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface

performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Cross-Connection Performance

Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which areequivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The

following table provides the primary performance.

Table 3-18 STM-1 optical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





Item Performance

Orderwire type Addressing call

Wire pair in each

transmission direction

One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN

equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire

phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is

established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-21 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined

byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.


Interface type Codirectional

Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-22 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or theHuawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2

Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the

ITU-T Recommendations.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table 3-23 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance

External synchronization

source

2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz

(compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)

Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out

ranges

Noise generation

Noise tolerance

Noise transfer

Transient response and

holdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-24 Wayside service interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the

microwave frame.


Impedance (ohm) 120

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-25 Mechanical behavior

Item PerformanceDimensions 20.60 mm (height) x 266.79 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm

(width)

Weight 1.08 kg

Power Consumption

Power consumption: < 13.6W

OptiX RTN 910




3-31



3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication,

switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are with

regard to the types and number of service interfaces.


The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.


The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-

connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the

CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE service interfaces, PDH/SDH service interfaces, auxiliary

interfaces, and management interfaces.

3.4.3 Working PrincipleThe CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packet

switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.

3.4.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, service interfaces, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons,

and labels on the front panel.



3.4.6 Valid Slots

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of

two ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS

so that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.


The E1 interf ace impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board feature

code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board

name.


This topic pr ovides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.


This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, cross-connection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance,

E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board

mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.


The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.


The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE service interfaces, PDH/SDH service interfaces, auxiliary

interfaces, and management interfaces.

Table 3-26 provide the functions and features of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

Table 3-26 Functions and features of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC


CSHA CSHB CSHC

Basic functions Switching

capability

Supports the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching function.

Cross-connect

capacity

Supports full time division cross-connections at the

VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are equivalent to

8x8 VC-4s.

System controland

communication

Manages, monitors, and controls the running state of the IDU, and works as a communication service unit

between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to

control and manage the NE.

Clock Clock

synchronization

at the physical

layer

Tracks the clock source and provides the system clock

and the frame headers of service signals and overhead

signals for the other boards.

The clock sources that can be tracked are as follows:

l External clock

l SDH line clock

l PDH tributary clock

l Clock at the air interface

l Synchronous Ethernet clock

Clock

protection




DCN Outband DCN Supports a maximum of seven DCCs.

Inband DCN Supports the inband DCN. The DCN bandwidth can be

configured.

Ethernet service processing Supported Supported Supported

See Table 3-27.

SDH service processing Not supported Not supported Supported

See Table 3-28.

PDH service processing Supported Supported Supported

See Table 3-29.

OptiX RTN 910




3-33




CSHA CSHB CSHC

Auxiliary

interfaces andmanagement

interfaces

Ethernet NM

interface

1

NM serial

interface

1

NE cascading

interface

1

Orderwire

phone interface

1

Asynchronous

data interface

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides one asynchronous

data interface. The transmission rate at the interface is

equal to or less than 19.2 kbit/s and the RSL at theinterface complies with the RS-232 standard.

Synchronous

data interface

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides one synchronous

data interface. The transmission rate at the interface is

64 kbit/s and the specifications of the interface comply

with ITU-T G.703.

External alarm

interface

Three inputs and one output

OM Warm resets and

cold resets

Supported

In-service

loading of the

FPGA

Supported

Query of the

manufacturing

information

about the board

Supported

Detection of the

temperature of

the board

Supported

Detection of the

voltage of the

board

Supported

Detection of the

indicators of the

other boards

Supported

Insertion and

removal of the

CF card

Supported

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC needs to work with the packet unit to implement the Ethernet service

processing function. Table 3-27 describes the Ethernet service processing function of the CSHA/

CSHB/CSHC.

Table 3-27 Ethernet service processing function of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC


CSHA CSHB CSHC

Basic functions Accesses FE/GE service signals and works with the

packet unit to process the FE/GE service signals.

Specifications

of the interfaces

FE electrical

interface:

10/100BASE-T

(X)

2 2 2

GE electrical

interface

(fixed):

10/100/1000BA

SE-T(X)

2 2 Not supported

GE interface:

SFP module

(1000BASE-

SX,1000BASE-LX,

and GE

electrical

module)

Not supported Not supported 2

Attributes of the

interfaces

Working mode l The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M

half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex,

and auto-negotiation.

l The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-

duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M

half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-

negotiation.

l The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-

duplex and auto-negotiation.

TAG attribute l Supports the setting and query of the TAG attribute

of an Ethernet port.

l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,

or hybrid.

Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with the maximum frame

length of 9600 bytes.

OptiX RTN 910




3-35




CSHA CSHB CSHC

Traffic control

function

Supports the port-based traffic control function that

complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Services E-LINE

services

l Supports port-based E-LINE services.

l Supports the E-LINE services that are based on port

+VLAN.


+QinQ.

E-LAN services l Supports the E-LAN services that are based on the

IEEE 802.1d bridge.

l Supports the E-LAN services that are based on the

IEEE 802.1q bridge.l Supports the E-LAN services that are based on the

IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

LAG Inter-board

LAG

Supported

Intra-board

LAG

Supported

ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.

Spanning tree

protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that uses only the common and internal

spanning tree (CIST). The MSTP functions are equivalent to the RSTPfunctions.

IGMP snooping

function

Supported

LPT Supported

QoS DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by mapping

service flows into different PHB service levels based

on the QoS information (including the C-VLAN

priority, S-VLAN priority, and DSCP) carried by the

packets.

Complex traffic

classification

Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports

according to the C-VLAN ID, S-VLAN ID, C-VLAN

priority, S-VLAN priority, C-VLAN ID + C-VLAN

priority, S-VLAN ID + S-VLAN priority, or DSCP in

a packet.

CAR Supported

Shaping Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized

queue, or traffic flow.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




CSHA CSHB CSHC

Queue

schedulingschemes

l SP

l WRR

l SP+WRR

ETH OAM IEEE 802.1ag

OAM

l Management of OAM maintenance points

l Continuity check test

l Loopback test

l Link trace test

IEEE 802.3ah

OAM

l OAM automatic discovery

l Link performance monitoring

l Fault detection

l Loopback at the remote end

l Self-loop detection and self-looped port blocking

Remote monitoring (RMON) Supported

Port mirroring Supported

Clock Clock source Synchronous

Ethernet

Synchronous

Ethernet

Synchronous

Ethernet (not

supported by the

SFP electricalmodule)

Clock

protection




DCN Inband DCN Each FE/GE port provides one channel of inband DCN.

OAM Loopback l Supports inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports.

Warm resets Supported

Query of the

information

about the SFP

module

Not supported Not supported Supported

Table 3-28 describes the SDH service processing function of the CSHC.

OptiX RTN 910




3-37



Table 3-28 SDH service processing function of the CSHC


CSHC



interfaces

Adopts the SFP optical module and supports the optical

interfaces of the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.

The characteristics of all the optical interfaces comply

with ITU-T G.957.


SNCP Supported

Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

Clock

protection




DCN Outband DCN Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is

composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or

twelve DCC bytes.

OM Loopback l Supports outloops at optical interfaces.

l Supports inloops at optical interfaces.

l

Supports outloops on VC-4 paths.l Supports inloops on VC-4 paths.

Setting of the

on/off state of a

laser

Supported

ALS functiona Supported

Detection and

query of the

information

about the SFPoptical module

Supported

Warm resets and

cold resets

Supported

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



NOTE





shuts down for 60 seconds.

l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser is recovered to normal and continuously emits light.

Table 3-29 describes the PDH service processing function of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

Table 3-29 PDH service processing function of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC


CSHA CSHB CSHC


Specifications

of the interfaces

75-ohm/120-

ohm E1

interface

16 32 16



Clock

protection


E1 retiming

function

Supported

OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

Warm resets and

cold resets

Supported

PRBS tests at E1

ports

Supported

3.4.3 Working PrincipleThe CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packet

switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.

NOTE

This topic considers the CSHC as an example to describe the working principle of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

OptiX RTN 910




3-39




Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram

Backplane

System control

and

communication

unit

Cross-connect

unit

Power

supply

unit

External alarm

interface

Clock unit

Clock signal provided

to the other boards

External clock signalClock

interface

STM-1

signal

processing

unit

E1 signal

processing

unit

VC-4

signal

VC-4

signal

E1 signal

Control bus

VC-4 signal

Asynchronous data

interfaceSynchronous data

interface

Orderwire

interface

Auxiliaryinterface

unit

-48 V1

-48 V2

Power supplied to

the other units on

the board

Clock signal

provided to

the other units

on the board

+12 V power supplied

to the fans

+3.3 V power supplied

to other boards

NM interface

NM serial interface

NE cascade

interface

Packet

switching unit

FE signal

access unit

GE signal

access unit

FE signal

GE signal

GE bus

FE signal

GE signal

Clock signal received

from other boards

Clock signal

received from

the service unit

on the board

TDM service board

Ethernet service

board

System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The

system control and communication unit performs the following functions:

l Controls and manages the other units on the board, and also collects alarms and performance


l Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance


l Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the

control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM in the IF board.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



l The CPU unit drives the packet switching unit to groom Ethernet service packets, through

the control bus.

l The CPU unit processes the Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit,

through the control bus.

l Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.

l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE

cascade interface.

l The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the

software.

l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads

the FPGA software.

l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU

unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:

– Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.

– Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services.

– Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between

different lines.

Packet Switching Unit

The main functional unit of the packet switching unit is the Layer 2 switching unit. The Layer

2 switching unit performs the operations related to the Layer 2 switching and Layer 2 protocol.

l After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from

other Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the

configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.l After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from other

Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system

control and communication unit for processing. The system control and communication

unit processes the protocol packets and then sends the protocol packets back to the packet

switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet

interface unit on the board or to the other Ethernet boards.

Cross-Connect Unit

The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order cross-

connect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-15 shows the functional block

diagram of the cross-connect unit.

OptiX RTN 910




3-41



Figure 3-15 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit

Source TDM

service unit

HOXC

LOXC

Sink TDMservice unit

The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit

through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect

unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If

the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit

grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order cross-

connect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the

higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and

then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

FE Signal Access UnitThe FE signal access unit provides access to two FE signals and works with the Layer 2 switching

unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.

l In the receive direction, after performing restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel

conversion for the FE signals, the FE signal access unit extracts framed FE signals by

delimiting the frames and adding the preambles and performs the CRC check and Ethernet

performance statistics.

l In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating the

CRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the FE signal access

unit performs the parallel/serial conversion, encodes the FE signals, and then transmits the

FE signals to the FE interface.

GE Signal Access Unit

The GE signal access unit provides access to two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signals

and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.

l In the receive direction, after performing the O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and

serial/parallel conversion for the GE optical signals or after performing restructuring,

decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the GE electrical signals, the GE signal access

unit extracts framed GE signals by delimiting the frames and adding the preambles and

performs the CRC check and Ethernet performance statistics.

l

In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating theCRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the GE signal access

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)







4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. E1 (1-16) interface

Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHB

C S H B

S T A T

P R O G

S Y N C

S R V

CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2E1

1~16

E1

17~32

1 2 3 4 5 6

1. Indicators 2. Buttons 3. Auxiliary interfaces andmanagement interfaces

4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. E1 (1-32) interface

Figure 3-18 Front panel of the CSHC

C S H C

S

T A T

P

R O G

S

Y N C

S

R V

CF RCV RSTNMS/COM NE CLK/TIME F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2

E1(1~16)

ETH STM-1 L

I N K 1

A

C T 1

L

I N K 2

A

C T 2

L

O S 1

L

O S 2

C S H C

S

T A T

P

R O G

S

Y N C

S

R V

CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2

E11~16

L

I N K 1

A

C T 1

L

I N K 2

A

C T 2

L

O S 1

L

O S 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

GE STM-1

GE1GE2STM-1

2121



4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. STM-1 optical interfaces

7. E1 (1-16) interface

Indicators

Table 3-30 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB




3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





l The board is not created.

l There is no power supplied to the

board.









BIOS boot state.


initialized.





fails.












board.


system.


Table 3-31 Description of the indicators on the CSHC




OptiX RTN 910




3-45







board.









BIOS boot state.


initialized.





fails.












board.


system.


LINK1 On (green) The port connection is normal.

Off The port connection is interrupted.

ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) The data is being transmitted or received.

Off No data is being transmitted or received.




3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)













Description of the Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces

Table 3-32 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces


NMS/COM NM interface/NM serial interface

RJ-45

EXT NE cascade interface

CLK/TOD External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or

2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface

F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface

ALMI/ALMO Alarm input/output interface

PHONE Orderwire interface

CF RCV CF configuration reset button -

RST Board warm reset button -

NOTE

l The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface can

transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data service

overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clock

interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.

l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,

however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent

transmission of the orderwire byte.

The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments

of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-19 shows the front view of the RJ-45

connector.

OptiX RTN 910




3-47




8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-33 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface


NMS/COM




4 Grounding end of the NM serial

interface

5 Receive end of the NM serial interface


7 Not defined

8 Transmit end of the NM serialinterface

Table 3-34 Pin assignment of the EXT interface


EXT





4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined

NOTE

The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data

through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, seeTable 3-35.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






Off The link fails.


receiving data.


receiving data.

NOTE

The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that noexternal Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,

an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed

on the NEs.

Figure 3-20 shows the two common incorrect connections.

Figure 3-20 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface

C S H A

S T A T

P R O G

S Y N C

S R V

CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2

E1

1~16

C S H A

S T A T

P R O G

S Y N C

S R V

CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2

E11~16

LAN

The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the

same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is provided

in Table 3-36.NOTE

Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not

used in this product version.

OptiX RTN 910




3-49



Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface

Pin Working Mode

Externa

l Clock

External

Time Input(1 PPS +TimeInformation)

External Time

Output(1 PPS + TimeInformation)

External

Time Input(DCLS)

External Time

Output(DCLS)

1 CLK

receivin

g (-)


2 CLK

receivin

g (+)


3 Not

defined

1 PPS signal

input (-)

(RS-422

level)

1 PPS signal

output (-)

(RS-422 level)

DCLS time

signal input (-)

(RS-422 level)

DCLS time

signal output (-)

(RS-422 level)

4 CLK

transmit

ting (-)

Grounding

end


5 CLK

transmit

ting (+)

Grounding

end


6 Not

defined

1 PPS signal

input (+)

(RS-422

level)

1 PPS signal

output (+)

(RS-422 level)

DCLS time

signal input (+)

(RS-422 level)

DCLS time

signal output (+)

(RS-422 level)

7 Not

defined

Time

information

input (-)

(RS-422

level)

Time

information

output (-)

(RS-422 level)


8 Not

defined

Time

information

input (+)

(RS-422

level)

Time

information

output (+)

(RS-422 level)


The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-37.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table 3-37 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface


F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals

2 Grounding end

3 Receiving asynchronous data signals

4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)

5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)

6 Grounding end

7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)

8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-38.

Table 3-38 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface


ALMI/

ALMO

1 The first external alarm input signal

2 Grounding end for the first alarm input signal

3 The second external alarm input signal

4 The third external alarm input signal

5 Grounding end for the third alarm input signal

6 Grounding end for the second alarm input signal

7 The first external alarm output signal (+)

8 The first external alarm output signal (-)

The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-39.

Table 3-39 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface


PHONE 1 Not defined

2

3

4 RING

OptiX RTN 910




3-51




5 TIP

6 Not defined

7

8

Service Interfaces

Table 3-40 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB

Interface Description Connector TypeFE1 FE interface

RJ-45FE2

GE1 GE electrical interface

GE2

E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1 signal

interfaces

Anea 96

E1 (17-32) The seventeenth to thirty-second

E1 signal interfaces a

NOTE

a. Only the CSHB provides 32 E1 signal interfaces. The CSHA provides only 16 E1 signal interfaces.

Table 3-41 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC


FE1 FE interface RJ-45

FE2

GE1 GE optical interface LC (the SFP optical module)

GE2

STM-1(1) The first STM-1 optical interface

STM-1(2) The second STM-1 optical

interface

E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1 signals Anea 96

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



The GE optical interface and STM-1 optical interface use the SFP optical module. One SFP

optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-21, in which

TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port.


TX RX

The FE interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-negotiation

modes. For the pin assignment information, see Table 3-42 and Table 3-43.

Table 3-42 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)

Table 3-43 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode




(+)


(-)

OptiX RTN 910




3-53






(+)


(+)


(-)


(-)


(+)


(-)

The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. The meanings of the two indicators are the same as the

meanings of the indicators on the NMS/COM interface (RJ-45 connector).

The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96

interface is provided in Figure 3-22 and Table 3-44.


POS.96

POS.1






signal (+)




signal (-)




signal (+)

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)







signal (-)






signal (-)




signal (+)




signal (-)




signal (+)




signal (-)




signal (+)




signal (-)












signal (+)




signal (-)




signal (+)

18 The ninth received E1differential signal (-)

42 The ninth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)




signal (+)




signal (-)









OptiX RTN 910




3-55








24 The twelfth received E1differential signal (-)

48 The twelfth transmitted E1differential signal (-)



































The CF card stores the following information:

l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data

l NE software and all the board software programs

l All the FPGA files

l License file for microwave link capability

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Figure 3-23 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

O N

D I P

1

2

3

4

2

1

1. DIP switches 2. CF card

Table 3-45 Setting the DIP switches


1 2 3 4

0 0 0 0 Normal

operating state

when the

watchdog is

enabled.

0 0 0 1 Reserved.

0 0 1 0 Memory self-

check state.

0 0 1 1 Commissioning

state.

0 1 0 0 Operating state

when the

watchdog is

disabled and the

full memory

check is

performed.

OptiX RTN 910




3-57




1 2 3 4

0 1 0 1 BIOS holdover

state.

0 1 1 0 BIOS exhibition

state.


default,

operating state

when the

watchdog is

started).

1 0 0 0 Reserved (bydefault,

operating state

when the

watchdog is

started).

1 0 0 1 To recover the

data of the CF

card.

1 0 1 0 To erase the data

in the system

parameter area.


databases.

1 1 0 0 To erase the NE

software,

including the

patches.


databases and

NE software

(including the

patches).


file system, that

is, to erase all

the data in the

file system.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




1 2 3 4


file system so

that all the data

is erased (file

system +

extended BIOS

+ system

parameter area).

NOTE

a: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch isturned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.

3.4.6 Valid Slots

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of

two ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logical

boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS

so that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

Figure 3-24 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1 (CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)


Different logical boards are allocated for the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC on the NMS.

Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU)


Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3S)Slot 1 (CSHA) Slot 10 ( AUX)

Figure 3-26 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot1 (CSHB )


Slot 10( AUX) Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3D)

OptiX RTN 910




3-59



Figure 3-27 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot1 (CSHC )


Slot 10( AUX) Slot 7 (EM4F) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)


The E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board feature


name.

Table 3-46 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC


A 120

B 75


This topic pr ovides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

Related References

A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting








This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, cross-

connection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance,

E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board

mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Packet Switching

Supports the 4.2Gbit/s packet switching function.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Cross-Connection Performance

Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are

equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.

Ethernet Interface Performance

The Ethernet interface performance meets the relevant standards specified in IEEE 802.3. The

following three tables provide the performance indexes of the GE optical interfaces, GE electrical

interfaces, and FE electrical interfaces, respectively.

Table 3-47 Performance of the GE optical interface

Item Performance


Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX

Fiber type Multiple-mode optical

fiber

Single-mode optical

fiber

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3

Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19

Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP

modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-48 GE electric interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)

1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ-45

OptiX RTN 910




3-61



Table 3-49 FE electric interface performance

Item Performance


100 (100BASE-TX)








Item Performance


Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-mode

fiber

Single-mode

fiber

Single-mode

fiber

Single-mode

fiber

Transmission distance(km)

2 15 40 80

Operating wavelength

(nm)

1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power

(dBm)

-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

Receiver minimum

sensitivity (dBm)

-30 -28 -34 -34

Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)

10 8.2 10 10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP

modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



E1 Interface Performance

Table 3-51 E1 interface performance

Item Performance Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048

Code pattern HDB3

Wire pair in each


One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75 120

Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-52 Orderwire interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-

defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type Addressing call

Wire pair in each


One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN

equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire

phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is

established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-53 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined

byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.


Interface type Codirectional

Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

OptiX RTN 910




3-63



Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-54 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item PerformanceTransmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the

Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2

Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in theITU-T Recommendations.

Table 3-55 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance

External synchronization

source

2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz

(compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)

Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out

ranges

Noise generation

Noise tolerance

Noise transfer

Transient response and

holdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-56 Wayside service interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the

microwave frame.


Impedance (ohm) 120

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.


The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides the management channel to the ODU,

and supplies the required –48 V power to the ODU.

Table 3-58 provides the functions and features of the IF1.

Table 3-58 Functions and features of the IF1


IF1

Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides the management channel to the ODU.

l Supplies the required –48 V power to the ODU.

Radio type TU/STM-1-based radio

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IF1.

Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/

SD protection

Supported

N+1 protection Supported

SNCP Supported

License Supports control on the air interface capacity by using

the license file.

Clock Clock source Clock at the air interface

Clock

protection


l Protection by using the SSM protocol (supported by

SDH radio only)

l Protection by using the extended SSM protocol(supported by SDH radio only)

DCN Inband DCN Not supported

Outband DCN l The PDH radio whose capacity is less than 16xE1

supports the DCCs provided by one DCC byte.

l The PDH radio whose capacity is not less than

16xE1 supports the DCCs composed of three DCC

bytes.

l The SDH radio supports the DCCs composed of

three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or twelve DCC

bytes.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




IF1

OM Loopback l Supports inloops at IF ports.

l Supports outloops at IF ports.

l Supports inloops at composite ports.

l Supports outloops at composite ports.

Warm resets and

cold resets

Supported

PRBS BER test

at IF ports

Supported

In-service

loading of theFPGA

Supported

Query of the

manufacturing

information

about the board

Supported

Detection of the

temperature of

the board

Supported

Detection of the

power of the board

Supported

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working

principle and signal flow of the IF1.

OptiX RTN 910




3-67




Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IF1

Backplane

Cross-connect unitI F I

F

processing

unit

Logicprocessingunit

System control and

communication unit

System control and

communication unit

MUX/DEMUXunit

MODEM

unit

Combiner

interface

unit

Power

supply

unit

SMODEM

unit

Clock

unit

Logic

control unit

System control and

communication unit

ODU control signal

Paired board

Microwave

frame signal

HSM signal bus

Service

bus

Overhead

bus

Control bus

-48 V

+3.3 V

-48 V power supplied

to the ODU

+3.3 V power supplied to

other modules on the

board

System clock signal

Clock signal provided

to the other units onthe board

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1

Step Functional Unit Processing Flow

1 Combiner interface

unit

Separates the ODU control signal and the microwave

service signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial interface

of the CPU unit in the system control and

communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through the

automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.

l Filters the signal.

l Performs A/D conversion.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates the

corresponding alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit

(for SDH microwave

signal processing)

l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and

R_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the

corresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks the link ID and generates the corresponding

alarms.

l Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and

generates the corresponding alarms and performance

events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and

reports the SSM status to the system control and

communication unit.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the

microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system

control and communication unit through the control

bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes

including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, andK bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and

transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic

processing unit.

l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2

Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s

overhead signal to the logic processing unit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the

corresponding performance events.

l Checks the higher order path overheads and generates

the corresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal to the logic processing unit.

OptiX RTN 910




3-69




MUX/DEMUX unit

(for PDH microwave

signal processing)

l Detects the PDH microwave frame header and


events.

l Verifies the check code and generates the


l Detects the link ID and generates the corresponding

alarms.




bus.


including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes

from the PDH microwave frame to form a 2 Mbit/soverhead signal, and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead

signal to the logic processing unit.

l Adjusts the TU pointers.

l Maps the TU-12s of the PDH microwave signals into

the specified position in the VC-4.

6 Logic processing

unit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8


overhead signal to the system control and

communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signaloccupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead

bandwidth.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication

signal to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits the service signals by HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX

unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board selects the signal of higher quality for

subsequent processing.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1


1 Logic processing

unit


l Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2

Mbit/s overhead signals.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal

from the cross-connect unit.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit

(for SDH microwave

signal processing)

l Sets the higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets the multiplex section overheads.

l Sets the regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

MUX/DEMUX unit

(for PDH microwave

signal processing)

l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets the PDH microwave frame overheads.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted

from the system control and communication unit.


unit

Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service

signal, and -48 V power supplies, and transmits the

combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.

The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the board

through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also

reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system

control and communication unit.

Power Supply unit

l Receives the -48 V power supply from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs

the start-relay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion operations, and then supplies the -48 V power to the ODU.

OptiX RTN 910




3-71



l Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the

+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

Clock Unit

This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock

signal to the other units on the board.

3.5.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IF1

PULL

I F 1

IFI O

ODU-PWR

S T A T

S R V

L I N K

O D U

R M T

A C T

WARNING

-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

I F 1

Indicators

Table 3-61 Description of the indicators on the IF1


STAT On (green) The board is working

normally.




l There is no power supplied

to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.On (red) Indicates that a critical or

major alarm occurs in the

service.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

Off The services are not

configured.

LINK On (green) The space link is normal.

On (red) The space link is faulty.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




ODU On (green) The ODU works normally.

On (red) l The logical board is not

added on the NMS

l The ODU has critical or

major alarms.

l No power is supplied.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On for 300 ms (yellow) and


The antennas are not aligned.

Off The ODU is not powered on.

RMT On (yellow) The equipment at theopposite end reports an RDI.

Off The equipment at the

opposite end does not report

an RDI.

ACT On (green) l The board is in the active

state in the 1+1 protection

system.

l The board is already

activated in the

unprotected system.

Off l The board is in the standby


system.

l The board is not activated

in the unprotected system.

Interfaces

Table 3-62 Description of the Interfaces

Interface Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable

IF IF interface TNC IF jumper b

ODU-PWR a ODU power switch - -

OptiX RTN 910




3-73



NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to

first pull the switch lever outwards slightly. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is

open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper is not required.

Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance

label on the front panel.

The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed

70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wear protective

gloves before handling the board.

The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch beforeremoving the IF cable.

The operation guidance label indicates that you need to pull the switch outward slightly before

setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

3.5.5 Valid Slots

The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the

same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-30 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1)

The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot

number of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus

20.

Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1)

Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9

Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 24 (ODU)

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table 3-63 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slot 3 > slot 4


This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.

Related References

A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute

A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeA.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs


This topic describes the board specifications, including microwave work modes, baseband signal

processing performance of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board

power consumption.

Microwave Work Modes

Table 3-64 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)

Service Capacity Modulation Mode Channel Spacing (MHz)

4xE1 QPSK 7

4xE1 16QAM 3.5

8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)

8xE1 16QAM 7

16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)

16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)

22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)

26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)

35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)

44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)

53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

OptiX RTN 910




3-75



NOTE

l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The

channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

l The OptiX RTN 910 whose configuration mode is the PDH microwave equipment supports the first six

microwave modulation modes.

l The OptiX RTN 910 whose configuration mode is the SDH microwave equipment supports all microwave

modulation mode. If the OptiX RTN 910 supports the 4xE1/16QAM microwave modulation mode, it cannot

use the high power ODU.

IF Performance

Table 3-65 IF performance

Item PerformanceIF signal

Transmit frequency of the IF

board (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IF

board (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK


board (MHz)

5.5


board (MHz)

10

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-66 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals

l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for

SDH microwave signals

Adaptive time-

domain equalizer for

baseband signals

Supported

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 225.80 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm

(width)

Weight 0.72 kg

Power Consumption

Power consumption: < 12 W

3.6 IFU2

The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and

Packet microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I power

distribution mode.

NOTE

In this ver sion, the IFU2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.


The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.3.6.2 Functions and Features

The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel

to the ODU, and supplies the required –48 V power to the ODU.


This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe

the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.

3.6.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

3.6.5 Valid Slots

The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be

the same as the physical slots.

3.6.6 Parameter Settings

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.


This topic describes the board specifications, including microwave work modes, IF performance,

modem performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.


The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

OptiX RTN 910




3-77




The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel

to the ODU, and supplies the required –48 V power to the ODU.

Table 3-68 provides the functions and features of the IFU2. The IFU2 needs to work with the packet unit to implement the Ethernet service processing function.

Table 3-68 Functions and features of the IFU2


IFU2



l

Supplies the required –48 V power to the ODU.

Radio type l Hybrid radio

l Packet radio

AM Supported

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.


SD protection

Supported


SNCP for TDM

services

Supported

ERPS

protection for

Ethernet

services

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032/Y.1344.

License Supports

control on the

air interface

capacity by

using the licensefile.

Supported

AM license Supported


Clock

protection




DCN Inband DCN Supported

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




IFU2

Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes.

Ethernet

services

E-LINE

services



+VLAN.

l Supports the E-LINE services that are based on

QinQ.


IEEE 802.1d bridge.


IEEE 802.1q bridge.l Supports the E-LAN services that are based on the




LAG Supported

Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that uses only the CIST.

The MSTP functions are equivalent to the RSTP

functions.

IGMP snooping function Supported





packets.

Complex traffic

classification

Supports traffic classification at IF port according to

the C-VLAN ID, S-VLAN ID, C-VLAN priority, S-

VLAN priority, C-VLAN ID + C-VLAN priority, S-

VLAN ID + S-VLAN priority, or DSCP in a packet.

CAR Provides the CAR function for the traffic flows at ports.



Queue

scheduling

schemes

l SP

l WRR

l SP+WRR

OptiX RTN 910




3-79




IFU2


OAM



l Loopback test

l Link trace test

IEEE 802.3ah

OAM



l Fault detection



RMON Supported


OM Loopback l Supports inloops and outloops at IF ports.

l Supports inloops and outloops at composite ports.

l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports.

NOTEThe IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board

of the Hybrid radio and is used to access the Ethernet services

transmitted by the Hybrid radio.

Cold resets and

warm resets

Supported

In-service

loading of the

FPGA

Supported

PRBS BER test

at IF ports

Supported

Query of the

manufacturing

informationabout the board

Supported

Detection of the

temperature of

the board

Supported

Detection of the

power of the

board

Supported

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.

NOTE

The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working

principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the

frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/

demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or

receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.


Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram of the IFU2

Backplane

Cross-connect unit

I F IF

processing

unit

Logic

processi

ngunit

System control and

communication unit

System control and

communication unit

MUX/DEMUXunit

MODEM

unit

Combiner

interface

unit

Power

supply

unit

SMODEM

unit

Clock

unit

Logic

control unit

ODU control signal

Paired board

Microwave frame

signal

HSM signal bus

Service bus

Overhead

bus

GE busPacket switching unit

Control bus

-48V2

-48 V power supplied to the ODU


the other units on the board

System clock signal

Clock signal provided to the

other units on the board

Ethernet

processin

g unit

+3.3 V

-48V1


the monitoring circuit

System control and

communication unit

OptiX RTN 910




3-81




Table 3-69 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2

Step FunctionalModule

Processing Flow


unit




l Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control

and communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Filters the signal.

l Performs the ADC sampling.

l Performs A/D conversion.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.




5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and


events.




alarms.




bus.


including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and

SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and


processing unit.

l Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service

signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then

transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.

l Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid

microwave service signals to the ethernet processing

unit.

6 Ethernet processing

unit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

DEMUX unit.

l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching

unit.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Processing Flow

7 Logic processing

unit


l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 8 Mbit/s


communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal

occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead

bandwidth.


signal to the cross-connect unitthe main and standby

cross-connect units.

NOTE





Table 3-70 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2


Processing Flow

1 Logic processing

unit







unit

l Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.

l Processes the GE signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.

l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and

microwave frame overheads to form microwave

frames.



OptiX RTN 910




3-83




Processing Flow




l Amplifies the signals.




unit











Power Supply Unitl This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs

the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the

ODU.

l This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs

the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to

the other units on the IFU2.

Clock Unit



3.6.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-33 Front panel of the IFU2

I F U 2

PULL

IF I O

ODU-PWR

S

T A T

S

R V

L

I N K

O

D U

R

M T

A

C T

WARNING

-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFORE

DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

I F U 2

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Indicators

Table 3-71 Description of the indicators on the IFU2



normally.





to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) Indicates that a critical or


service.




configured.





added on the NMS


major alarms.







RMT On (yellow) The equipment at the

opposite end reports an RDI.



an RDI.

OptiX RTN 910




3-85






system.


activated in the

unprotected system.



system.



Interface and Switch

Table 3-72 Description of the Interfaces




NOTE




b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper

is not required.

Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance

label on the front panel.




The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch before

removing the IF cable.



3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



3.6.5 Valid Slots

The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be


Figure 3-34 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2)



20.

Figure 3-35 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2)




Item Description



This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.

Related References


A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute

A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration

A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes

A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes

A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

OptiX RTN 910




3-87




This topic describes the board specifications, including microwave work modes, IF performance,

modem performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.


Table 3-74 Hybrid microwave work modes (IFU2 board)

ChannelSpacing (MHz)

ModulationMode

ServiceCapacity(Mbit/s)

MaximumNumber ofE1s inServices

EthernetThroughput(Mbit/s)

7 QPSK 10 5 9 to 11

7 16QAM 20 10 19 to 23

7 32QAM 25 12 24 to 29

7 64QAM 32 15 31 to 37

7 128QAM 38 18 37 to 44

7 256QAM 44 21 43 to 51

14 (13.75) QPSK 20 10 20 to 23

14 (13.75) 16QAM 42 20 41 to 48

14 (13.75) 32QAM 51 24 50 to 59

14 (13.75) 64QAM 66 31 65 to 76

14 (13.75) 128QAM 78 37 77 to 90

14 (13.75) 256QAM 90 43 90 to 104

28 (27.5) QPSK 42 20 41 to 48

28 (27.5) 16QAM 84 40 82 to 97

28 (27.5) 32QAM 105 50 108 to 125

28 (27.5) 64QAM 133 64 130 to 150

28 (27.5) 128QAM 158 75 160 to 180

28 (27.5) 256QAM 183 75 180 to 210

56 (55) QPSK 84 40 82 to 97

56 (55) 16QAM 168 75 165 to 190

56 (55) 32QAM 208 75 208 to 240

56 (55) 64QAM 265 75 260 to 310

56 (55) 128QAM 313 75 310 to 360

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




ModulationMode




56 (55) 256QAM 363 75 360 to 420

IF Performance


Item Performance

IF signal


board (MHz)

350


board (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK


board (MHz)

5.5


board (MHz)

10



Item PerformanceEncoding mode The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.

Adaptive time-


baseband signals

Supported

OptiX RTN 910




3-89



Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 225.80 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)

Weight 0.79 kg

Power Consumption

Power consumption : < 23 W

3.7 IFX2

The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave

and Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.

NOTE

In this ver sion, the IFX2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.


The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.


The IFX2 transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel to the ODU,and supplies the required –48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the IFX2 provides the cross-

polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals.



the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.

3.7.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on

the front panel.

3.7.5 Valid Slot

The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be



This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.


This section describes the board performance, including microwave work modes, IF

performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.


The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




The IFX2 transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel to the ODU,

and supplies the required –48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the IFX2 provides the cross-

polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals.Table 3-78 provides the functions and features of the IFX2.

Table 3-78 Functions and features of the IFX2


IFX2



l

Supplies the required –48 V power to the ODU.

Radio type l Hybrid radio

l Packet radio

AM Supported

XPIC Supported

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.


SD protection

Supported


SNCP for TDM

services

Supported

ERPS

protection for

Ethernet

services

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032/Y.1344.

License Supports

control on the

air interfacecapacity by

using the license

file.

Supported

AM license Supported


Clock

protection




OptiX RTN 910




3-91




IFX2

DCN Inband DCN Supported

Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes.

Ethernet

services

E-LINE

services



+VLAN.


+QinQ.


IEEE 802.1d bridge.


IEEE 802.1q bridge.





LAG Supported



functions.

IGMP snooping function Supported





packets.

Complex traffic

classification

Supports traffic classification at IF port according to

the C-VLAN ID, S-VLAN ID, C-VLAN priority, S-

VLAN priority, C-VLAN ID + C-VLAN priority, S-

VLAN ID + S-VLAN priority, or DSCP in a packet.




Queue

scheduling

schemes

l SP

l WRR

l SP+WRR

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




IFX2


OAM



l Loopback test

l Link trace test

IEEE 802.3ah

OAM



l Fault detection



RMON Supported


OM Loopback l Supports inloops and outloops at IF ports.

l Supports inloops and outloops at composite ports.

l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports.

NOTEThe IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board

of the Hybrid radio and is used to access the Ethernet services

transmitted by the Hybrid radio.

Cold resets and

warm resets

Supported

In-service

loading of the

FPGA

Supported

PRBS BER test

at IF ports

Supported

Query of the

manufacturing

informationabout the board

Supported

Detection of the

temperature of

the board

Supported

Detection of the

power of the

board

Supported

OptiX RTN 910




3-93





the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.

NOTE

The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working

principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the

frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/

demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or

receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.


Figure 3-36 Functional block diagram of the IFX2

Backplane

Cross - connect unit

I IF

processing

unit

Logic

processi

ng

unit System control and

communication unit

System control and

communication unit

M

UX/DEM

UX

unit

MODEM

unit

Com

biner

interface

unit

Power

supply

unit

Clock

unit

Logic

control unit

ODU control signal

Paired board

Microwave frame

signal

HSM signal bus

Service bus

Overhead

bus

GE busPacket switching unit

Control bus

- 48 V power supplied to the ODU

+3.3V power supplied to the other

units on the board

System clock signalClock signal provided to the


Ethernet

processing

unit

+3 .3

V

- 48 V1

+3.3V power supplied to the

monitoring circuit

XPIC signal

F

System control and

communication unit

SMODEM

unit

- 48 V2

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Table 3-79 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2

Step FunctionalModule Processing Flow


unit




l Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control

and communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Performs the ADC sampling.

l Filters the signal and splits the signal to two channels.

– Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal andtransmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit.

– Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.

4 MODEM unit l Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from the

paired IFX2 and transmits the converted signal to the

MODEM unit.

l Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IF

signal from the paired IFX2 as a reference signal.




OptiX RTN 910




3-95




Processing Flow

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and


events.




alarms.




bus.


including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, andSSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and


processing unit.

l Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service

signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then

transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.

l Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid

microwave service signals to the Ethernet processing

unit.


unit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

DEMUX unit.

l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching

unit.

7 Logic processing

unit


l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8





bandwidth.



NOTE




3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Table 3-80 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2

Step FunctionalModule Processing Flow

1 Logic processing

unit







unit

l Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.

l Processes the GE signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.

l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and

microwave frame overheads to form microwave

frames.






l Amplifies the signals.




unit











OptiX RTN 910




3-97



Power Supply Unit


the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the

ODU.


the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to

the other units on the IFX2.

Clock Unit



3.7.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels onthe front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-37 Front panel of the IFX2

I F X 2

IF I O

ODU-PWR

S T A T

S R V

L I N K

O D U

R M T

A C T

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFORE

DISCONNECTING IF CABLE I F X 2

X-IN X-OUTPULL X P I C

Indicators

Table 3-81 Description of the indicators on the IFX2


XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is

normal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function is

disabled.


normally.





to the board.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






major alarm occurs in theservice.




configured.





added on the NMS


major alarms.











an RDI.



system.

l The board is alreadyactivated in the

unprotected system.



system.



OptiX RTN 910




3-99



Interfaces

Table 3-82 Description of the interfaces




X-IN XPIC signal input

interface

SMA XPIC cable

X-OUT XPIC signal output

interface

SMA

NOTE




b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper

is not required.

Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.




The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch before

removing the IF cable.



3.7.5 Valid Slot

The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be


Figure 3-38 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2)

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





20.

Figure 3-39 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2)




Item Description



This topic pr ovides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.

Related References








3.7.7 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board performance, including microwave work modes, IF

performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

OptiX RTN 910




3-101




Table 3-84 Hybrid microwave work modes (IFX2 board)


ModulationMode




28 (27.5) QPSK 42 19 41 to 48

28 (27.5) 16QAM 84 40 84 to 97

28 (27.5) 32QAM 104 49 103 to 120

28 (27.5) 64QAM 132 63 130 to 150

28 (27.5) 128QAM 159 75 160 to 180

28 (27.5) 256QAM 182 75 180 to 210

56 (55) QPSK 83 39 83 to 97

56 (55) 16QAM 167 75 165 to 190

56 (55) 32QAM 214 75 210 to 245

56 (55) 64QAM 263 75 260 to 305

56 (55) 128QAM 312 75 310 to 360

56 (55) 256QAM 360 75 360 to 410

NOTE

l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The

channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the service capacity. The bandwidth remaining

after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the service capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.

IF Performance


Item Performance

IF signal


board (MHz)

350


board (MHz)

140

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Item Performance

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK


board (MHz)

5.5


board (MHz)

10



Item Performance

Encoding mode The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.

Adaptive time-


baseband signals

Supported

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


Weight 0.80 kg

Power Consumption

Power consumption: < 33 W

3.8 EM6T/EM6F

The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces and

two GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as

follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE

interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or

electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatiblewith the FE electrical interfaces.

OptiX RTN 910




3-103




The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.


The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.


This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe

the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.

3.8.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.

The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE

interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.

3.8.5 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the

NMS should be the same as the physical slots.


The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code

that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.


This topic pr ovides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.


This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE

interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.


The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.

Table 3-88 provides the functions and features of the EM6T/EM6F. The EM6T/EM6F needs

to work with the packet unit of the system control board to implement the Ethernet service

processing function.

Table 3-88 Functions and features of the EM6T/EM6F


EM6T EM6F

Basic functions Accesses FE/GE service signals and works with the

packet unit to process the FE/GE service signals.

Specifications

of the interfaces

FE electrical

interface:

10/100BASE-T

(X)

4 4

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




EM6T EM6F

GE electrical

interface(fixed):

10/100/1000BA

SE-T(X)

2 Not supported

GE interface:

SFP module

(1000BASE-

SX,

1000BASE-LX,

and GE

electrical

module)

Not supported 2

Attributes of the

interfaces

Working mode l The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M

half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex,

and auto-negotiation.

l The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-

duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M

half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-

negotiation.

l The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-

duplex and auto-negotiation.

TAG attributes l Supports the setting and query of the TAG attribute

of an Ethernet port.

l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,

or hybrid.



Traffic control

function

Supports the port-based traffic control function that

complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Services E-LINE

services



+VLAN.


+QinQ.


IEEE 802.1d bridge.


IEEE 802.1q bridge.



OptiX RTN 910




3-105




EM6T EM6F

LAG Inter-board

LAG

Supported Supported

Intra-board

LAG

Supported Supported

ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032/Y.1344.



functions.

IGMP snooping function Supported Supported

LPTa Supported Supported





packets.

Complex traffic

classification

Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports

according to the C-VLAN ID, S-VLAN ID, C-VLAN

priority, S-VLAN priority, C-VLAN ID + C-VLAN

priority, S-VLAN ID + S-VLAN priority, or DSCP ina packet.




Queue

scheduling

schemes

l SP

l WRR

l SP+WRR


OAM



l Loopback test

l Link trace test

IEEE 802.3ah

OAM



l Fault detection



3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




EM6T EM6F

RMON Supported Supported

Port mirroring Supported Supported

Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet Synchronous Ethernet

(not supported by the SFP

electrical module)

Clock

protection




DCN Inband DCN Each FE/GE port provides one channel of inband DCN.

OAM Loopback l Supports inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports.

Warm resets and

cold resets

Supported Supported

Query of the

manufacturing

information

about the board

Supported Supported

Detection of the

temperature of

the board

Supported Supported

Query of the

information

about the SFP

module

Not supported Supported

NOTE

a: The LPT function is used to detect the faults that occur at the service access node and in the intermediatetransmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that accesses the service of

starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, thus ensuring the normal transmission

of the important data.


This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe

the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.

OptiX RTN 910




3-107




Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram

GE signal

access unit

FE signal

access unit

Ethernet

processing

unit

Logic

processing

unit

Logiccontrol unit

Clock unit

Backplane

Control bus of the board

System control andcommunication unit

Packet switching unit

GE signal

FE signal

Ethernet

signal

Ethernet

signal

Control bus

+3.3 V+3.3 V backup power

supplied to the board

System clockClock signal provided to the


Control signal

Control signal

Power

supply unit

-48 V1

-48 V2+3.3 V power supplied to

the board


Table 3-89 Signal processing flow in the receive direction


1 GE signal access unit l Provides access to GE signal.

l Performs reassembling, decoding, and serial/parallel

conversion for the GE signals.

l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC

code processing, and Ethernet performance count for

the frame signals.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





unit

l Adds the tags identifying the ingress ports to the

Ethernet data frames.

l Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.l Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic

classification and CAR traffic monitoring, for the

Ethernet data frames.

l Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the logic

processing unit.

3 Logic processing

unit

Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the packet

switching unit.


Table 3-90 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction


1 Logic processing unit l Selects the Ethernet data frames from the packet

switching unit.

l Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet

processing unit.

2 Ethernet processingunit

l Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.

l Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic shaping

and queue scheduling, for the Ethernet data frames.

l Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the

corresponding egress ports based on the egress tags

contained in the Ethernet data frames.

3 GE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

code computing, and Ethernet performance count.

l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for the

Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE/

GE signals through the Ethernet interfaces.


The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access by using the control signal.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit through

the control unit on the board.

The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit through

the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system controland communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control

OptiX RTN 910




3-109



unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance

events are reported to the system control and communication unit through the logic control unit.

Power Supply Unit

This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into

the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as

a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.

Clock Unit



3.8.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.

The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE

interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-41 Front panel of the EM6T

E M 6 T

S T A T

S R V

FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4GE2 E

M 6 T

GE1 P R O G

Figure 3-42 Front panel of the EM6F

E M 6 F

S T A T

S R V

GE2 E

M 6 F

GE1 L I N K 1

L I N K 2

CLASS1

LASER

PRODUCT

FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 P R O G

Indicators

Table 3-91 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F




3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






l There is no power supplied to the board.


On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.


PROG On for 100 ms (green) and off




On for 300 ms (green) and off



being reset, the board software is in BIOS

boot state.

On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.

On for 100 ms (red) and off for

100 ms repeatedly



fails.

On (red) When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the memory self-check fails or

loading the upper layer software fails.

When the board is running, the logic file or

upper layer software is lost.



LINK1a On (green) The GE1 interface is connected correctly

and is not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow) The GE1 interface is receiving or

transmitting data.

Off The GE1 interface is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.



Flashing (green) The GE2 interface is receiving or

transmitting data.



OptiX RTN 910




3-111



NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the

corresponding GE optical interfaces.

Interfaces

Table 3-92 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F

Interfac

e

Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable

FE1 FE interface

RJ-45 5.8 Network Cable

FE2

FE3

FE4

GE1 GE electrical

interface

(EM6T)GE2

GE1 GE optical

interface or GE

electrical

interface (EM6F)

LC (SFP optical module) or

SFP electrical module

5.5 Fiber Jumper or 5.8

Network CableGE2

The GE optical interface of the EM6F uses the SFP optical module. One SFP optical module

provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-43, in which TX represents the

transmit port and RX represents the receive port.


TX RX

The FE electrical interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI and MDI-X adaptation

modes. For the front view and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-44 and refer

to Table 3-93 and Table 3-94.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table 3-93 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode




(+)


(-)


(+)


(+)


(-)


(-)


(+)


(-)

Table 3-94 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode




(+)


(-)


(+)


(+)


(-)


(-)

OptiX RTN 910




3-113






(+)


(-)

The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For meaning of the indicators, see Table 3-95.




Off The link fails.


receiving data.


receiving data.

LabelThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS

1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm

(10 mW).

3.8.5 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the

NMS should be the same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-45 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)

Figure 3-46 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU)

Slot 1

Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot10 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table 3-96 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F

Item Description



The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code

that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.

Table 3-97 Board feature code of the EM6F

Board Feature Code Module Type BOM Code of the Module

01 1000BASE-SX (Multi-

mode, 0.5 km)

34060286

02 1000BASE-LX (Single-

mode, 10 km)

34060473

03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

(100m)

34100052


This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.

Related References

A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes

A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control

A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes

A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes


This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE

interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

Performance of Optical Interfaces

The optical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3. The

following table lists the main specifications for the optical interfaces.

OptiX RTN 910




3-115



Table 3-98 Performance of the GE optical interface

Item Performance


Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX

Fiber type Multiple-mode optical

fiber

Single-mode optical

fiber

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3

Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19

Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP

modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Performance of GE Electrical Interfaces

The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.

The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical interfaces.

Table 3-99 GE electric interface performance

Item Performance


100 (100BASE-TX)

1000 (1000BASE-T)



4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)


Performance of FE Electrical Interfaces

The FE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.

The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical interfaces.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table 3-100 FE electric interface performance

Item Performance


100 (100BASE-TX)




Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

EM6T EM6F

Dimensions 19.82mm (height) x 225.80 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)

Weight 0.37 kg 0.38 kg

Power Consumption

Power consumption of EM6T: < 10.4 W

Power consumption of EM6F: < 11.3 W

3.9 SL1D

The SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.


The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.

3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.


This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working

principle and signal flow of the SL1D.

3.9.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

3.9.5 Valid Slots

The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be



OptiX RTN 910




3-117



The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature


name.


This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.


This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,

board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.


The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.


The SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.

Table 3-102 provides the functions and features of the SL1D.

Table 3-102 Functions and features of the SL1D


SL1D



interfaces

l Adopts the SFP optical module and supports the

optical interfaces of the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2

types.

l The characteristics of all the optical interfaces

comply with ITU-T G.957.


SNCP Supported

Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

Clock

protection




DCN Outband DCN Supported

OM Loopback l Supports outloops at optical interfaces.

l Supports inloops at optical interfaces.

l Supports outloops on VC-4 paths.

l Supports inloops on VC-4 paths.

Warm resets and

cold resets

Supported

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




SL1D

Setting of the

on/off state of alaser

Supported

ALS functiona Supported

In-service

loading of the

FPGA

Supported

Query of the

manufacturing

information

about the board

Supported

Detection and

query of the

information

about the SFP

optical module

Supported

NOTE





shuts down for 60 seconds.

l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser is recovered to normal and continuously emits light.


This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working

principle and signal flow of the SL1D.

OptiX RTN 910




3-119




Figure 3-47 Functional block diagram of the SL1D

Clock signal provided to the


Backplane

Logic

control

unit

STM-1

STM-1

O/E

conversion

unit

Overhead

processing

unit

Logic

processing

unit

System control and

communication unit

Overhead

bus

System control and

communication unit

Cross-connect unit

Clock

unit System clock signal

+3.3 V

Servicebus

Control bus

Supplies power to the



Table 3-103 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D


1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.

l Detects the R_LOS alarm.

l Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electrical

signals.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




2 Overhead processing

unit

l Restores the clock signal.

l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and

R_LOF alarms.l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the


l Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and


events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and

reports it to the system control and communication

unit.

l

Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K

bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the

logic processing unit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the

corresponding performance events.

l Checks the higher order path overheads and generates

the corresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4

signal to the logic processing unit.

3 Logic processingunit

l

Processes the clock signal.l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8





bandwidth.




Table 3-104 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D


1 Logic processing

unit






OptiX RTN 910




3-121




2 Overhead processing

unit

l Sets the higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets the multiplex section overheads.

l Sets the regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.


The SL1D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.

The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the SL1D



The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system

control and communication unit and loads the FPGA software.

Clock Unit



3.9.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-48 Front panel of the SL1D

S L 1 D

TX1/RX1

CLASS1

LASERPRODUCT

S L 1 D

S T A T

S R V

L O S 1

L O S 2

TX2/RX2

Indicators

Table 3-105 Description of the indicators on the SL1D



normally.


3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)







to the board.




service.




configured.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface of

the SL1D reports the R_LOS

alarm.

Off The first optical interface of

the SL1D does not report the

R_LOS alarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface

of the SL1D reports the

R_LOS alarm.Off The second optical interface

of the SL1D does not report

the R_LOS alarm.

Interfaces

Table 3-106 Description of the interfaces


TX1 Transmit port of the

first STM-1 optical

interface

LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

RX1 Receive port of the

first STM-1 optical

interface

TX2 Transmit port of the

second STM-1

optical interface

LC (SFP)

OptiX RTN 910




3-123




RX2 Receive port of the

second STM-1

optical interface

Labels

There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS

1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm

(10 mW).

3.9.5 Valid Slots

The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be


Figure 3-49 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 4 (SL1D)

Figure 3-50 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 4 (SL1D)


Table 3-107 Slot allocation for the SL1D

Item Description



The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature

code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the boardname.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table 3-108 Board feature code of the SL1D

Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of theOptical Module

01 Ie-1 (Multi-mode, 2km) 34060287

02 S-1.1 (Single-mode, 15km) 34060276

03 L-1.1 (Single-mode, 40km) 34060281

04 L-1.2 (Single-mode, 80km) 34060282


This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.

Related References

A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces

A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead



This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,

board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.





Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-mode

fiber

Single-mode

fiber

Single-mode

fiber

Single-mode

fiber

Transmission distance

(km)

2 15 40 80

Operating wavelength

(nm)

1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power

(dBm)

-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

OptiX RTN 910




3-125



Item Performance

Receiver minimum

sensitivity (dBm)

-30 -28 -34 -34

Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)

10 8.2 10 10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP

modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 225.80 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm

(width)

Weight 0.30 kg

Power Consumption

Power consumption: < 3.4 W

3.10 SP3S/SP3D

The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm

tributary board.


The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.


The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.


This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working

principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.

3.10.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.

3.10.5 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMSshould be the same as the physical slots.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of

the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.


This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.


This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board

mechanical behavior and board power consumption.


The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.


The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

Table 3-111 provides the functions and features of the SP3S/SP3D.

Table 3-111 Functions and features of the SP3S/SP3D


SP3S SP3D


Specifications

of the interfaces

75-ohm/120-

ohm E1interface

16 32



Clock

protection


E1 retiming

function

Supported

OM Loopback l Supports inloops at E1 tributary ports.

l Supports outloops at E1 tributary ports.

Cold resets and

warm resets

Supported

PRBS tests at E1

ports

Supported

Query of the

manufacturing

information

about the board

Supported

OptiX RTN 910




3-127




This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working

principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.


Figure 3-51 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D

Backplane

Logic

control

unit

Cross-connect unit

E1

E1

Interfaceunit

Mapping/Demapp

i

ngunit

System control and

communication unit

Service bus

Control bus

E1 signal Codecunit

Logic

processingunit

+3.3 V

Clockunit

Clock signal provided to theother units on the board

System clock signal

Power

Supply Unit

-48 V1+3.3V power supplied

to the board -48 V2

+3.3V backup power

supplied to the board


Table 3-112 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D


1 Interface unit The external E1 signals are coupled by the transformer

and then are transmitted to the board.

2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Recovers the clock signal.

l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.

l Performs the HDB3 decoding.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




3 Mapping/

Demapping unit

l Asynchronously maps the signals into C-12s.

l Adds the path overhead bytes to the C-12s, thus

forming VC-12s.l Processes the pointers, thus forming TU-12s.

l Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-12s, thus

forming one TUG-2.

l Performs the byte interleaving for seven TU-2s, thus

forming one TUG-3.

l Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-3s, thus

forming one C-4.

l Adds the higher order path overhead bytes to the C-4,

thus forming one VC-4.

4 Logic processing

unit





Table 3-113 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D


1 Logic processing

unit




2 Mapping/

Demapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.

l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.

l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the


l Extracts the E1 signals.

3 Codec unit Performs the HDB3 coding.

4 Interface unit The E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then

are transmitted to the external cable.


The SP3S/SP3D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication

unit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the

OptiX RTN 910




3-129



SP3S/SP3D through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events

are also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.



Power Supply Unit

This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into

the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as

a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.

Clock Unit



3.10.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-52 Front panel of the SP3S

S P 3

S

S T A T

S R V

1-16 S

P 3

S

E1

Figure 3-53 Front panel of the SP3D

S P 3 D

S T A T

S R V

42

22

21

1 S P 3 D

Indicator

Table 3-114 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D



normally.


3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)







to the board.




service.




configured.

Interface

Table 3-115 Description of the interface on the SP3S

Interface Description ConnectorType

Corresponding Cable

1-16 The first to sixteenth

E1 interfaces

Anea 96 E1 Cable to the External

Equipment or E1 Cable to the

E1 Panel

Table 3-116 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D

Interface Description ConnectorType

Corresponding Cable

1-21 The first to sixteenth

E1 interfaces


Equipment orE1 Cable to the

E1 Panel

22-42 The seventeenth to

thirty-second E1

interfaces


Equipment orE1 Cable to the

E1 Panel

NOTE

In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, only the ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D interface are used. Ports 1-16

correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.

The interfaces on the SP3S/SP3D use the Anea 96 connectors. The pin assignment informationof the Anea 96 interfaces is provided in Figure 3-54 and Table 3-117.

OptiX RTN 910




3-131




POS.96

POS.1






signal (+)




signal (-)




signal (+)




signal (-)






signal (-)




signal (+)




signal (-)




signal (+)




signal (-)




signal (+)




signal (-)





3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





3.10.5 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS

should be the same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-55 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Figure 3-56 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)


Table 3-118 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D

Item Description



The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of

the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.

Table 3-119 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D


A 120

B 75


This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Related References

A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces


3.10.8 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board

mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

E1 Interface Performance

Table 3-120 E1 interface performance

Item Performance


Code pattern HDB3

Wire pair in each


One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75 120

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

SP3S SP3D


Weight 0.54 kg 0.64 kg

Power consumption

Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W

Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W

3.11 PIU

The PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.


The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.


OptiX RTN 910




3-135



The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning

protection, and information reporting.


The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication

unit, and board in-position unit.

3.11.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and power access interfaces.

3.11.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the same

as the physical slot.


This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.

3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PIU is TNC1.


The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning

protection, and information reporting.

Table 3-122 provides the functions and features of the PIU.

Table 3-122 Functions and features of the PIU


PIU

Basic functions Power access One PIU is provided and the PIU accesses two -48 V

DC or -60 V DC power inputs.

Protection Protection Supports 1+1 HSB protection.

Power

protection

l Protection against overcurrent

l Protection against short circuits

Lightning

protection

function

Supported


The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication

unit, and board in-position unit.

Figure 3-57 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Figure 3-57 Functional block diagram of the PIU

Communicationunit

Board

in-position unit

Backplane

Inter-boardcommunication

bus System control andcommunication unit

Lightning p rotectionand failure detection

unit

-48 V/-60 V

Board in-position signal

Alarm signal ind icatinglightning failure

Other boards

Other boards

Alarm signal

indicating lightningfailure


Lightning protection

and failure detectionunit

-48 V/-60 V

Lightning Protection and Failure Detection UnitThis unit protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the lightning

protective circuit. If the lightning protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to system

control and communication unit, through the communication unit.

Communication Unit

This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and alarm

signals indicating the lightning protection failure to the system control and communication unit.

Board In-Position Unit

This unit reports the board in-position signals to the system control and communication unit.

3.11.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and power access interfaces.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-58 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.

Figure 3-58 Front panel of the PIU

P W R A

P W R B

PIU

R T N 2

( + )

N E G 2

( - )

R T N 1

( + )

N E G 1

( - )

-48V -60V

OptiX RTN 910




3-137



Indicators

Table 3-123 Description of the power status indicators

Indicator Status Description

PWRA On (green) The power supply is connected.

Off There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power

supply is connected incorrectly.

PWRB On (green) The power supply is connected.



Interfaces

The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 3-124 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU

and their respective usage.

Table 3-124 Description of the interfaces on the PIU

Interface Interface Type Usage

NEG1(-) -48 V power input

interface

Inputs the -48 V power.

RTN1(+) BGND power input

interface

Inputs the BGND power.

NEG2(-) -48 V power input

interface

Inputs the -48 V power.

RTN2(+) BGND power input

interface

Inputs the BGND power.

Label

The label on the front panel indicates that the PIU accesses multiple power supplies.

CAUTION

Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,

ensure that these power supplies are disabled.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



3.11.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the same

as the physical slot.

Figure 3-59 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU)Slot 1

Slot 3 Slot 4

Figure 3-60 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 Slot 4



This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.

Table 3-125 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.

Table 3-125 Technical specifications

Item Performance

Dimensions 41.4 mm (width) x 224.8 mm (depth) x 21.0

mm height)

Weight 0.12 kg

Power Consumption < 0.5 W

Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V

3.12 FANThe FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.


The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.


The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.


The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speedadjustment unit, and board in-position unit.

OptiX RTN 910




3-139



3.12.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.

3.12.5 Valid Slots

The FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS should

be the same as the physical slot.


This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power

consumption, and working voltage.


The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.


The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.

Table 3-126 provides the functions and features of the FAN.

Table 3-126 Functions and features of the FAN


FAN

Power input Accesses one +12 V power input from the system control

board.

Number of fans 3

Power of a single fan 6 W

Intelligent fan speed

adjustment

Supported

Protection Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans and

protects fans against overcurrent.

OM l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,

alarms, version number, and board in-position status.l Provides alarm indicators.

l Disables the power supplies to the fans.


The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speed

adjustment unit, and board in-position unit.

Figure 3-61 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Figure 3-61 Functional block diagram of the FAN


Three fans

+12 V power

shutdown signalInter-board

communicationbus

Board in-positionunit

PWM signal

Communication unit


Fan rotatingspeed

Fan in-position

signal

+12 V

+12 V

+12 V

Start

delay

+12 V

Intelligent fan speedadjustment unit

PWM drivingunit

Rotating speed

reporting uni t

System control and

communication unit

System control and

communication unit

System control and

communication unit

Start-Delay UnitThis unit protects the fan power supplies against start delay and overcurrent.

Communication Unit

This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and ambient

temperature information to the system control and communication unit. In addition, it provides

the +12 V power shutdown signal to the start-delay unit.

Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Unit

This unit reports the fan rotating speed to the system control and communication unit and adjusts

the fan rotating speed based on the three pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals that are received

from the system control and communication unit. The PWM signals of the fans are isolated from

each other.

The system adjusts the fan rotating speed according to the working temperature, as listed in

Table 3-127.

Table 3-127 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed

Working Temperature Rotating Speed

≤ 25°C Low speed (3200 rotation/min)

OptiX RTN 910




3-141



Working Temperature Rotating Speed

25°C to 60°C Linear increase in accordance with the

temperature

≥ 60°C Full speed (16000 rotation/min)

Board In-Position Unit

This unit reports the board in-position information to the system control and communication

unit.

3.12.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-62 shows the front panel of the FAN.

Figure 3-62 Front panel of the FAN

Indicators

Table 3-128 Description of the fan status indicators


FAN On (green) The fan is running normally.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



ESD Wrist Strap Jack

The ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to realize the proper

grounding of the human body.

Labels

The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:

l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.

l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch the fan leaves when the fan is rotating.

3.12.5 Valid Slots

The FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS should

be the same as the physical slot.

Figure 3-63 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis

Slot 6

(FAN)

Slot 5

(PIU)

Slot 3 Slot 4

Slot 10

Figure 3-64 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 Slot 4



This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power

consumption, and working voltage.

Table 3-129 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.

Table 3-129 Technical specifications for the FAN

Item Performance

Dimensions 42.0 mm (width) x 217.6 mm (depth) x 28.5 mm height)

Weight 0.200 kg

Power consumption <2.3 W (room temprature)

<17 W (high temperature)

Working voltage 10.8 V-13.2 V (for accessing the 12 V DC power)

OptiX RTN 910




3-143





4 Accessories

About This Chapter

The accessories of the OptiX RTN 910 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit

(PDU). You need to select the accessories based on the actual requirements.

4.1 E1 Panel

When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The

E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.

4.2 PDU

The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input

power to the equipment in the cabinet.

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories



4-1



4.1 E1 Panel

When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The

E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.

The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1

panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

1-8

9-16

Interfaces

Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel

Interface Description Type of Connector

T1-T16 Transmit port of the 1st to

16th E1 ports (connected to

the external equipment)

BNC

R1-R16 Receive port of the 1st to 16th

E1 ports (connected to the

external equipment)

1-8 1st to 8th E1 ports (connected

to an IDU)

DB37

9-16 9th to 16th E1 ports

(connected to an IDU)

Grounding bolt Connecting a protection

ground cable

-

NOTE

The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer to

Table 4-2.

4 Accessories

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)


20 1st E1 receiving differentialsignal (+) 21 1st E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

2 1st E1 receiving differential

signal (-)

3 1st E1 transmitting differential

signal (-)

22 2nd E1 receiving differential

signal (+)

23 2nd E1 transmitting differential

signal (+)

4 2nd E1 receiving differential

signal (-)


signal (-)

24 3rd E1 receiving differential

signal (+)

25 3rd E1 transmitting differential

signal (+)

6 3rd E1 receiving differential

signal (-)


signal (-)

26 4th E1 receiving differential

signal (+)

27 4th E1 transmitting differential

signal (+)


signal (-)


signal (-)


signal (+)


signal (+)

17 5th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

16 5th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)


signal (+)


signal (+)


signal (-)


signal (-)


signal (+)


signal (+)


signal (-)


signal (-)

OptiX RTN 910




4-3





signal (+)


signal (+)

11 8th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

10 8th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

Others Reserved - -

4.2 PDU

The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input

power to the equipment in the cabinet.

4.2.1 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches

on the front panel of the PDU.

4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle

The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power

to the equipment in a cabinet.

4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode

The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power

distribution mode is used.

4.2.1 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches

on the front panel of the PDU.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU

NEG2(-)

INPUT

RTN2(+)RTN1(+) NEG1(-)

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

1 2 3 4

1 4

1 2 3 4

OUTPUT OUTPUT A B

2

20A20A 20A 20A20A20A 20A 20A

5 6

1. Output power terminals (A) 2. PGND terminals

4 Accessories

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



3. Input power terminals 4. Output power terminals (B)

5. Power switches (A) 6. Power switches (B)

Interfaces

Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU

Position Interface Description

Output power

terminals (A)

+ Power output (+)

- Power output (-)

PGND

terminals

Grounding stud

of the two-holeOT terminal

For connecting the PGND cable

Input power

terminals

RTN1(+) The first power input (+)

RTN2(+) The second power input (+)

NEG1(-) The first power input (-)

NEG2(-) The second power input (-)

Output power

terminals (B)

+ Power output (+)

- Power output (-)

Power

switches (A)

20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse

capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right

correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A side,

respectively.

Power

switches (B)

20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse

capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right

correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B side,

respectively.

4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle

The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power

to the equipment in a cabinet.

Functions

l The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.

l Each input power supply supports four outputs.

l The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A.

l The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.

OptiX RTN 910




4-5



Working Principle

The PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers

(MCBs). The PDU supports the simple power distribution function for the input power.

Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW1

SW2

SW4

SW4

INPUT

RTN1(+)

RTN2(+)

NEG1(-)

NEG2(-)

+ 1-

+ 2-

+ 3-

+ 4

-

+ 1-

+ 2-

+ 3-

+ 4-

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

PGND

BGND

BGND

4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode

The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power

distribution mode is used.

The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that is

inside the PDU.

DC-C Power Distribution ModeWhen the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuits

terminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND.

4 Accessories

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution Mode

To use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar.

Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode

OptiX RTN 910




4-7





5 Cables

About This Chapter

This topic describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignment information of various cables

of the IDU 910.

5.1 Power Ca ble

The power ca ble connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,

the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.

5.2 PGND Cable

The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND

cable.

5.3 IF Jumper

The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit

the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.

5.4 XPIC Ca ble

The XPIC ca ble is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of the

XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.

5.5 Fiber Jumper

The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an

LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the

OptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated

depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.

5.6 E1 Cables

The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment

and E1 cable to the E1 panel.

5.7 Orderwire Cable

The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire

cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the

PHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected

to the interface of the orderwire phone.

5.8 Network Cable

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables



5-1



The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable

are terminated with RJ-45 connectors.

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



5.1 Power Cable

The power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,

the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-1 Power cable

1U DC connector

Single cord end terminal

Power cable

Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable

Model Cable Terminal

2.5 mm2 power

cable and

terminal

Power Cable, 450 V/

750 V, H07Z-K-2.5

mm2, Blue/Black,

Low Smoke Zero

Halogen Cable

Common Terminal, Single Cord End Terminal,

Conductor Cross Section 2.5 mm2, 12.5 A,

Insertion Depth 8 mm, Blue

NOTE

In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, the power cable whose core has a sectional area of 2.5 mm 2 can extend for

a maximum distance of 50 m.

5.2 PGND Cable

The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND

cable.

5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the

external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the

external equipment share the same ground.

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

OptiX RTN 910




5-3



The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of

the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and

the external equipment share the same ground.

5.2.1 IDU PGND CableThe IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the

external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the

external equipment share the same ground.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable

2

Main label

H.S.tubeCable tie1

L

1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignment

None.

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and

the external equipment share the same ground.

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Cable Diagram

Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable

1

Main label

L

Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignment

None.

5.3 IF Jumper

The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit

the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.

The IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper is terminated with a type-N

connector and is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper is terminated with a

TNC connector and is connected to the IF board.

NOTE

l The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Thus, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper

is not required.

l When the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-

inch IF cable to the IF board.

OptiX RTN 910




5-5



Cable Diagram

Figure 5-4 IF jumper

1

2H.S.tube 2 PCS

L = 3 cm

2000 mm

1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Pin Assignment

None.

5.4 XPIC Cable

The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of theXPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.

The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC

cable is connected to the X-IN port of one IFX2 board of an XPIC working group, and the other

end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other IFX2 board of the same XPIC

working group.

When the XPIC function of an IFX2 board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the X-IN

port and X-OUT port of the IFX2 board to loop back signals.

The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:

l

XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long,and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the horizontal direction.

l XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is very

short, and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the vertical direction. The XPIC cable

using straight connectors is also used to connect the X-IN port and X-OUT port of the same

IFX2 board to loop back signals.

The OptiX RTN 910 uses the XPIC cables with angle connectors.

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Cable Diagram

Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable

L1

11

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male

Cable Connection Table

None.

5.5 Fiber Jumper

The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an

LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the

OptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminateddepends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.

Types of Fiber Jumpers

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers

Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable

LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber

2 mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber


LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber


NOTE

In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to the 1000Base-SX GE opticalinterfaces.

OptiX RTN 910




5-7



Fiber Connectors

The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,

SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.

Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector

5.6 E1 Cables

The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment

and E1 cable to the E1 panel.

5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment

The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals

directly to the external equipment.

5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel

The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the

E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with

a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is

terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.

5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable

An E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit

cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.

The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to

the E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.

5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment

The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals

directly to the external equipment.

Each E1 cable to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. The E1

cables to the external equipment are categorized into two types, namely, 75-ohm coaxial cables

and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

OptiX RTN 910




5-9



Cable Diagram

Figure 5-9 E1 cable

Main label

1

W

X1 A

View A

Pos .1

Pos.96 Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,

Female Connector

1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

NOTE

l The appearance of the 120-ohm E1 cable is the same as the appearance of the 75-ohm E1 cable.

l The core of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use 2.5 mm (0.098-inch) crimp pliers to terminate

the ends of E1 cables on the DDF frame with 75-1-1 coaxial connectors.

Pin Assignment

Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable

Pin W1 Remarks

Pin W2 Remarks

Core SerialNo.

Core SerialNo.

1 Tip 1 R1 25 Tip 2 T1

2 Ring 26 Ring

3 Tip 3 R2 27 Tip 4 T2

4 Ring 28 Ring

5 Tip 5 R3 29 Tip 6 T3

6 Ring 30 Ring

7 Tip 7 R4 31 Tip 8 T4

8 Ring 32 Ring

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Pin W1 Remarks

Pin W2 Remarks

Core SerialNo.

Core SerialNo.

9 Tip 9 R5 33 Tip 10 T5

10 Ring 34 Ring

11 Tip 11 R6 35 Tip 12 T6

12 Ring 36 Ring

13 Tip 13 R7 37 Tip 14 T7

14 Ring 38 Ring

15 Tip 15 R8 39 Tip 16 T8

16 Ring 40 Ring

17 Ring 17 R9 41 Ring 18 T9

18 Tip 42 Tip

19 Ring 19 R10 43 Ring 20 T10

20 Tip 44 Tip

21 Ring 21 R11 45 Ring 22 T11

22 Tip 46 Tip

23 Ring 23 R12 47 Ring 24 T12

24 Tip 48 Tip

49 Ring 25 R13 73 Ring 26 T13

50 Tip 74 Tip

51 Ring 27 R14 75 Ring 28 T14

52 Tip 76 Tip

53 Ring 29 R15 77 Ring 30 T15

54 Tip 78 Tip

55 Ring 31 R16 79 Ring 32 T16

56 Tip 80 Tip

Shell Braid Shell Braid

OptiX RTN 910




5-11



Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable

Pin W1 Remarks

Pin W2 Remarks

Color of

theCore

Relatio

n

Color of

theCore

Relatio

n

1 White Twisted

pair

R1 25 White Twisted

pair

T1

2 Blue 26 Orange

3 White Twisted

pair

R2 27 White Twisted

pair

T2

4 Green 28 Brown

5 White Twisted

pair

R3 29 Red Twisted

pair

T3

6 Grey 30 Blue

7 Red Twisted

pair

R4 31 Red Twisted

pair

T4

8 Orange 32 Green

9 Red Twisted

pair

R5 33 Red Twisted

pair

T5

10 Brown 34 Grey

11 Black Twisted

pair

R6 35 Black Twisted

pair

T6

12 Blue 36 Orange

13 Black Twisted

pair

R7 37 Black Twisted

pair

T7

14 Green 38 Brown

15 Black Twisted

pair

R8 39 Yellow Twisted

pair

T8

16 Grey 40 Blue

17 White Twisted

pair

R9 41 White Twisted

pair

T9

18 Blue 42 Orange

19 White Twisted

pair

R10 43 White Twisted

pair

T10

20 Green 44 Brown

21 White Twisted

pair

R11 45 Red Twisted

pair

T11

22 Grey 46 Blue

23 Red Twisted

pair

R12 47 Red Twisted

pair

T12

24 Orange 48 Green

49 Red Twisted

pair

R13 73 Red Twisted

pair

T13

50 Brown 74 Grey

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Pin W1 Remarks

Pin W2 Remarks

Color oftheCore

Relation

Color oftheCore

Relation

51 Black Twisted

pair

R14 75 Black Twisted

pair

T14

52 Blue 76 Orange

53 Black Twisted

pair

R15 77 Black Twisted

pair

T15

54 Green 78 Brown

55 Black Twisted

pair

R16 79 Yellow Twisted

pair

T16

56 Grey 80 Blue


5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel

The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the

E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with

a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is

terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.

Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel

1500 mm

A

APos.1

Pos.44

X1B

Pos.1

Pos.37

B

X2

X1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male X2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male

OptiX RTN 910




5-13





Cable Diagram

Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors

Label 2M092

X3

X22

#4-40View BPos.44

Pos.1

Main Label

W2

W1

Label 1

X1 A

B

400

X1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3. Cable connector, type-D, 44 female

Label 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44

connectors

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

W1 X1.2 X2.38 R1 X1.10 X2.34 R5

X1.1 X2.23 X1.9 X2.19

X1.26 X2.15 T1 X1.34 X2.11 T5

X1.25 X2.30 X1.33 X2.26

X1.4 X2.37 R2 X1.12 X2.33 R6

X1.3 X2.22 X1.11 X2.18

X1.28 X2.14 T2 X1.36 X2.10 T6

X1.27 X2.29 X1.35 X2.25

X1.6 X2.36 R3 X1.14 X2.32 R7

X1.5 X2.21 X1.13 X2.17

OptiX RTN 910




5-15



Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

X1.30 X2.13 T3 X1.38 X2.9 T7

X1.29 X2.28 X1.37 X2.24

X1.8 X2.35 R4 X1.16 X2.31 R8

X1.7 X2.20 X1.15 X2.16

X1.32 X2.12 T4 X1.40 X2.8 T8

X1.31 X2.27 X1.39 X2.7

W2 X1.18 X3.38 R9 X1.50 X3.34 R13

X1.17 X3.23 X1.49 X3.19

X1.42 X3.15 T9 X1.74 X3.11 T13

X1.41 X3.30 X1.73 X3.26

X1.20 X3.37 R10 X1.52 X3.33 R14

X1.19 X3.22 X1.51 X3.18

X1.44 X3.14 T10 X1.76 X3.10 T14

X1.43 X3.29 X1.75 X3.25

X1.22 X3.36 R11 X1.54 X3.32 R15

X1.21 X3.21 X1.53 X3.17

X1.46 X3.13 T11 X1.78 X3.9 T15

X1.45 X3.28 X1.77 X3.24

X1.24 X3.35 R12 X1.56 X3.31 R16

X1.23 X3.20 X1.55 X3.16

X1.48 X3.12 T12 X1.80 X3.8 T16

X1.47 X3.27 X1.79 X3.7


5.7 Orderwire Cable

The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire

cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the

PHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected

to the interface of the orderwire phone.

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Cable Diagram

Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable

1

6

1

6

1 Main label

X1 X2

1. Orderwire interface, RJ-11 connector

Pin Assignment

Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Function

X1.3 X2.3 Tip

X1.4 X2.4 Ring

5.8 Network Cable

The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable

are terminated with RJ-45 connectors.

Two types of interfaces use the RJ-45 connectors, which are the medium dependent interface

(MDI) and MDI-X. The MDI interface is used by the terminal equipment, for example, the

network card. For the pin assignment information of the MDI interface, see Table 5-8. The MDI-

X interface is used by the network equipment. For the pin assignment information of the MDI-

X interface, see Table 5-9.

Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface




(+)


(-)


(+)

OptiX RTN 910




5-17






(+)


(-)


(-)


(+)


(-)

Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface




(+)


(-)


(+)


(+)


(-)


(-)


(+)


(-)

Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables are

used between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between the

straight through cable and crossover cable is with regard to the pin assignment.

The NMS/COM interface, NE interface, and Ethernet service electrical interfaces of the OptiXRTN 910 support the MDI and MDI-X autosensing modes. Straight through cables and crossover

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM interface, EXT interface, and Ethernet service

electrical interfaces to MDI or MDI-X interfaces.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-13 Network cable

1

8

1

8

1Label 1 Label 2Main Label

1. Network port connector, RJ-45

Pin Assignment

Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable


X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair

X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange

X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

OptiX RTN 910




5-19




X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A Parameters Description

This topic describes the parameters used in this document.

A.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).

A.2 Parameters for Cable Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.

A.3 Parameters for Communications Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.

A.4 Radio Link Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.

A.5 Multiplex Section Protection ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).

A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.

A.7 Clock Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.

A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.

A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.

A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and

maintenance (OAM).

A.11 QoS Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.

A.12 RMON Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.

A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description



A-1



This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.

A.15 Parameters for Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.


OptiX RTN 910


A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).

A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.

A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE

time.

A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.

A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions

of an NE.

A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

Navigation Path

On the Main Topology, choose File > Discovery > NE.

OptiX RTN 910




A-3



Parameters for the Search Field

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Address Type IP Address of GNE

NSAP Address

IP Address Range of GNE

IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol is

used on the DCN, youcan search for an NE

based on NSAP

Address only.

l If the IP protocol is

used on the DCN, you

can search for an NE

based on IP Address of

GNE or IP Address

Range of GNE.

l To search for all the

NEs that communicatewith the gateway NE,

select IP Address

Range of GNE.

l To select the gateway

NE only, select IP

Address of GNE.

NOTEIf Address Type is set to IP

Address of GNE or IP

Address Range of GNE,

and if the U2000 (server)

and the gateway NE arelocated in different network

segments, ensure that the

U2000 and relevant routers

are configured with the IP

routes for the network

segment in which the

U2000 and gateway NE are

located.

If Address Type is set to

NSAP Address, ensure that

the OSI protocol stack is

installed.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






Create NE after search Selected

Deselected

Deselected l To create NEs in

batches, it is

recommended that you

select Create NE after

search. The NEs are

automatically created

after they are found.

l After Create NE after

search is selected,

enter NE User and

Password that are used

for creating an NE.

NOTEIf only Create NE after

search is selected, Searchfor NE is selected

automatically.

NE User - - l This parameter

specifies the user name

to be entered when an

NE is created.

l This parameter is valid

only when Create NE

after search is

selected.

Password - - l This parameter

specifies the password


NE is created.


only when Create NE

after search is

selected.

Upload after create Selected

Deselected

Deselected l This parameter

specifies whether to

automatically uploadthe NE data after the

NE is found and

created.

l If only Upload after

create is selected,

Search for NE and

Create NE after

search are selected

automatically.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameter for the Found NEs


NE ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the found NE,which consists of

extended ID and NE ID.

For example, in the case of

NE9-25, the value 9

indicates the extended ID,

and the value 25 indicates

the NE ID.

GNE Address - - This parameter indicates

the address of the gateway

NE that is connected to the

found NE.

GNE ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the gateway NE

that is connected to the

found NE.

Created As GNE Yes

No

Yes l This parameter

specifies the password


NE is created.


only when Create NEafter search is

selected.

Connection Mode Common

Security SSL

Common The communication

between the client and the

server is encrypted if this

parameter is set to

Security SSL.

Port - 1400 This parameter specifies

the communication port.

NE Status Created

Uncreated

- This parameter indicateswhether the found NE is

created.

A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.

OptiX RTN 910




A-7



Navigation Path

1. In the Physical View, right-click New > NE.

2. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Type - - This parameter indicates

the type of the NE to be

created.

ID - - l The ID refers to the

basic ID. If the

extended ID is not

used, the basic ID of an

NE must be unique onthe networks that are

managed by the same

NMS.

l This parameter is set

according to the

planning information.

NOTEThe NE ID consisting of the

basic ID and extended ID

identifies an NE on the

NMS.

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the

range represented by the

basic ID, do not change

the extended ID.

Name - - l This parameter

specifies the name of

the NE.

l After you specifies the

name of the NE, the

name is displayedunder the icon of the

NE.

Remarks - - This parameter specifies

the remarks of the NE.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






Password - - This parameter specifies

the password to be entered

when an NE is created.

NSAP Address - - This parameter indicates

the NSAP address of the

new NE. This parameter

needs to be set when

Affiliated Gateway

Protocol is set to OSI.

You need to set the area ID

only, and the other parts

are automatically

generated by the NE.

A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Navigation Path

1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.

2. Choose Object Attributes.

3. Click Modify NE ID.

Parameters for Changing NE IDs


New ID - - l The new ID refers to

the basic ID. If the

extended ID is not

used, the basic ID of an

NE must be unique on

the networks that are

managed by the same

NMS.


according to the


NOTEThe NE ID consisting of the

basic ID and extended ID

identifies an NE on the

NMS.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the

range represented by the

basic ID, do not change

the extended ID.

A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

Navigation Path

1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization fromthe Main Menu.

2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Parameters for NE Time Synchronization


NE Name - - This parameter indicates

the name of the NE.


the ID of the NE.

Synchronous Mode Standard NTP

NM

Null

Null l If this parameter is set

to NM, the NE

synchronizes the time

of the NMS server.

l If this parameter is set

to Standard NTP, the

NE synchronizes the

Network Time

Protocol (NTP) server

through the standard

NTP.

Standard NTP

Authentication

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled This parameter is valid

only when Synchronous

Mode is set to Standard

NTP.

OptiX RTN 910




A-11



Parameters for the Standard NTP Server


Standard NTP Server

Identifier

NE ID

IP

NE ID l If the NE functions as

the gateway NE, this parameter is set to IP.

l If the NE functions as a

non-gateway NE and

communicates with the

gateway NE through

the HWECC protocol,

this parameter is set to

NE ID.


non-gateway NE and

communicates with thegateway NE through

the IP protocol, this

parameter is set to IP.

Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions as

the gateway NE, this

parameter is set to the

IP address of the

external NTP server.


non-gateway NE, this

parameter is set to theID or IP address of the

gateway NE.

Standard NTP Server

Key

0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server does

not need to

authenticated, this

parameter is set to the

value "0".

l If the NTP server needs

to be authenticated, the

authentication is

performed according to

the allocated key of the

NTP server. In this

case, the NE

authenticates the NTP

server based on the key

and the corresponding

password (specified in

the management of the

standard NTP key).


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time


NE - - This parameter indicates the name of the

NE.

TimeZone - - This parameter indicates the time zone.

DST - - This parameter indicates whether DST is

enabled.

Parameters for Time Zone


Time Zone - - l After the time zone is changed, the

current time of the NE is changed

accordingly.

l This parameter is set according to the

place where the NE is located.

DST Selected

Deselected

Deselected l The parameters related to daylight saving

time can be valid only when this

parameter is selected.


situation whether daylight saving time is

used in the place where the NE is located.

Offset 1 to 120

Unit: minute(s)

- This parameter specifies the offset value of

the daylight saving time.

Start Rule DATE

WEEK

WEEK This parameter specifies the method of

adjusting the daylight saving time.

Start Time - - This parameter specifies the start daylight

saving time.

End Rule DATE

WEEK

WEEK This parameter specifies the method of

adjusting the daylight saving time.

End Time - - This parameter specifies the end daylight

saving time.

A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Navigation Path

1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the Main Menu.

2. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.




the name of the NE.


the ID of the NE.

Key 1 to 1024 - l This parameter

indicates the key for NTP authentication.


according to the

requirements of the


Password - - l This parameter

indicates the password

that corresponds to

Key.


according to the

requirements of the


OptiX RTN 910




A-15




Trusted Yes

No

Yes l When this parameter is

set to No, the key

verification is not

trusted. After receiving

the key, the NE rejects

the clock

synchronization

service.

l When this parameter is

set to Yes, the key

verification is trusted.

After receiving the key,

the NE provides the

clock synchronization

service.

l After receiving an

unknown or incorrect

key, the NE rejects the

clock synchronization

service. Hence, it is


set a trusted key only.

A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functionsof NEs

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions

of an NE.

Navigation Path

1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic

Disabling of NE Function.

2. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and

then click .

Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs


NE Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the

NE.

NE Type OptiX RTN 910 - This parameter indicates the type of the NE.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Operation Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the

operation, such as loopback, and shutdown

of the laser.

Auto Disabling Disabled

Enabled

Enabled This parameter specifies whether to

automatically disable the operations such as

loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

Auto Disabling

Time(min)

1 to 2880 5 This parameter specifies the time of

automatically disabling the operations such

as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

A.2 Parameters for Cable ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.

A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.

A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.

A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.

A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.

Navigation Path

1. Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the Main Menu.

2. Select the board of the NE on which the fiber needs to be searched for or the IF board of

the NE on which radio links need to be searched for from the Subject Tree, and the click

.

3. Click Search.

Parameters for Searching For Fibers


Source NE - - This parameter indicates

the name of the source NE

on which fibers or radio

links are found.

OptiX RTN 910




A-17




Source Board - - This parameter indicates

the board and slot of the

source NE on which fibers

or radio links are found.

Source Port - - This parameter indicates

the number of the port on

the board of the source NE


links are found.

Sink NE - - This parameter indicates

the name of the sink NE on

which fibers or radio links

are found.

Sink Board - - This parameter indicates

the board and slot of the

sink NE on which fibers or

radio links are found.

Sink Port - - This parameter indicates

the number of the port on

the board of the sink NE


links are found.

Level - - This parameter indicates

the level of the found fiber

or the working mode of

the found radio link.

Name - - This parameter indicates

the name of the found

fiber or radio link.

Direction Two-Fiber Bidirectional

Single-Fiber

Unidirectional

- This parameter indicates

the direction of the found

fiber.

Conflict with logical link (Y/N)

Yes

No

- This parameter indicateswhether the found fiber or

radio link conflicts with

the fiber or radio link

displayed on the NMS.

Operation Result Succeeded

Failed


whether the cable is

created successfully.

Fiber/Cable Type - - This parameter indicates

the type of the found fiber

or cable.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.

Navigation Path

1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is

displayed.

2. Choose Link > Fiber from the Object Tree.

Parameters for Fibers


Create Ways Common Ways

Batch Ways

Common Ways l If Common Ways is

selected, fibers need to

created one by one.

l If Batch Ways is

selected, fibers can be

created in batches.

Fiber/Cable Type Fiber Fiber This parameter indicates

that Fiber/Cable Type to

be created is a fiber.

Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the fiber to be

created. The name

consists of up to 255

characters, excluding

certain special marks such

as | * ? " < >.

Remarks - - This parameter specifies

the remark information

customized by the user.

Source NE - - This parameter specifiesthe source NE on which

the fiber needs to be

created.

Source NE Slot-Board

Type-Port

- - This parameter specifies

the board, slot, and port of

the source NE on which

the fiber needs to be

created.

Rate Level - - This parameter indicates

the level that corresponds

to the port on the board.

OptiX RTN 910




A-19





Parameters for Microwave Links


Fiber/Cable Type Radio Link Radio Link This parameter indicates

that a radio link needs to be created is Fiber/Cable

Type.

Name - - This parameter specifies

the name of the radio link

to be created. The name

consists of up to 255

characters, excluding

certain special marks such

as | * ? " < >.

Remarks - - This parameter specifiesthe remark information

customized by the user.

Source NE - - The parameter specifies


the radio link needs to be

created.

Source NE Slot-Board

Type-Port




the radio link needs to be

created.

Rate Level - - This parameter indicates

the level that corresponds

to the port on the IF board.

Sink NE - - The parameter specifies

the sink NE on which the

radio link needs to be

created.

Sink NE Slot-Board

Type-Port



the sink NE on which the

radio link needs to be

created.

Length(km) - - This parameter specifies

the length of the radio link

to be created.

Created On - - This parameter indicates

the time when the radio

link is created.

OptiX RTN 910




A-21





This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.

A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.

A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.

A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.

A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication ParameterSetting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >

Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Parameters for NE Communication Setting


IP Address - Before delivery,

the IP address of

the NE is set to

129.9.0.x. Theletter x indicates

the basic ID.

In the HWECC solution, an IP address is

set according to the following rules:

l The IP address, subnet mask, and

default gateway of the gateway NE

should meet the planning requirements

of the external DCN.

l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP

address must be in the same network

segment.

l The IP address of other NEs should be

set according to the NE ID. In this case,

the IP address of an NE should be set

in the format of 0x81000000+ID. That

is, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address

should be set to 129.9.0.1.

Gateway IP Address - 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when

the number of actual NEs does not

exceed the range permitted by the basic

NE ID.

l It is recommended that this parameter

takes the default value.

Connection Mode Common

Security SSL

Common The communication between the client

and the server is encrypted if this

parameter is set to Security SSL.

OptiX RTN 910




A-23






DCC Resources - - This parameter indicates the DCC

resources.

CommunicationStatus

- - This parameter indicates thecommunication status.

Protocol Type HWECC

TCP/IP

OSI

HWECC It is recommended that you use the default

value, except for the following cases:

l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted,

Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.

l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,

Protocol Type is set to OSI.

LAPD Role User

Network

User l This parameter is valid only when

Protocol Type is set to OSI.

l In the case of a DCC channel, LAPD

Role must be set to User for one end and

must be set to Network for the other end.

A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC TransparentTransmission Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC

Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.

Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management


Source Timeslot/

Porta

- - This parameter indicates the source timeslot

or port.

OptiX RTN 910




A-25




Transparent

Transmission of

Overhead Bytes at

Source Port

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

E1

E2

F1

K1

K2

X1

X2

X3

X4

- l Only one overhead byte can be selected

each time.

l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate thecustomized overhead bytes that are used

for transmitting asynchronous data

services.

l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is

used. For example, an overhead byte

cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.

Sink Timeslot/

Porta

- - This parameter indicates the sink timeslot or

port.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Transparent

Transmission of

Overhead Bytes at

Sink Port

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

E1

E2

F1

K1

K2

X1

X2

X3

X4

- l Only one overhead byte can be selected

each time.

l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that isused. For example, an overhead byte

cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.

l Generally, Transparent Transmission

of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be

set to a value that is the same as or

different from the value in the case of

Source Timeslot/Port.

NOTE

a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions

the same regardless of the source port or sink port.

A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet PortExtended ECC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.

Navigation Path

Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the

Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 910




A-27



Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode


ECC Extended

Mode

Automatically

Assign

Specified mode

Automatically

Assign

It is recommended that you use the default

value.

Parameters for Setting the Server


IP - 0.0.0.0 This parameter indicates the IP address of

the server.

Port 1601 to 1699 1601 l This parameter is valid only when ECCExtended Mode is set to Specified

mode.

l This parameter can be set only when the

NE functions as the server of the

extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE

that is close to the U2000 functions as the

server.

l This parameter can be set to any value

from 1601 to 1699.

Parameters for Setting the Client


Opposite IP - 0.0.0.0 l This parameter is valid only when ECC

Extended Mode is set to Specified

mode.

l This parameter can be set only when the

NE functions as the client of the extended

ECC. Except for the NE that functions as

the server, all other NEs that use theextended ECC can function as the client.

l Opposite IP and Port are respectively set

to the IP address of the server NE and the

specified pot number.

Port 1601 to 1699 1601

A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC

Link Management from the Function Tree.

Parameter for NE ECC Link Management


Destination NE - - This parameter specifies the sink NE of the

ECC connection.

Transfer NE - - This parameter specifies the next transfer

NE and the direction of the ECC route.

Distance 0 to 64 0 l This parameter specifies the number of

NEs (excluding the source NE and sink

NE) through which the ECC route passes,namely, the number of ECC packet

forwarding attempts. The value can be set

to a value that is greater than the number

of actual ECC packet forwarding

attempts. If the value is set to a value that

is less than the number of actual ECC

packet forwarding attempts, however, the

destination NE fails to be accessed.

l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the

source NE is adjacent to the destination

NE.

Level 4

5

- l This parameter indicates that multiple

ECC routes from the source NE to the

destination NE may be available. An

ECC route of a higher priority is selected

to transmit the packets to the destination

NE.

l If the ECC route is generated

automatically, the priority is 4.

l If the ECC route is added manually, the

priority is 5.

Mode Manual

Automatic

- This parameter indicates the ECC routing

mode.

SCC No. - - This parameter specifies the physical port

through which the ECC route passes. The

value of this parameter is automatically

assigned the NE.

OptiX RTN 910




A-29



A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IPRoute Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP

Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IP Route Management tab.

Parameters for IP Route Management


Destination

Address

- - This parameter specifies the destination

address of the packets. This parameter can

be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or

C only, but cannot be set to the IP address

of the local host or the loopback address

with the 127 field.

Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.

Gateway IP - - This parameter specifies the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the

NE is located, namely, the IP address of thenext hop of the packets.

Protocol DIRECT

STATIC

OSPF

RIP

OSPF_ASE

OSPF_NSSA

- l DIRECT: indicates the route between

the local NE and an adjacent NE.

l STATIC: indicates the route that is

created manually.

l OSPF: indicates the route between the

local NE and a non-adjacent NE.

l RIP: indicates the route that is discovered

by the routing information protocol.

l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whoseDestination Address is beyond the

OSPF domain.

l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose

Destination Address is in a not so stubby

area (NSSA).

l A route can be deleted in the case of

STATIC only, but cannot be edited in the

other cases.

l Compared with a dynamic route, a static

route has a higher priority. If any conflict

occurs, the static route is preferred.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Interface - - This parameter indicates the interface that is

used on the route. Interface is a concept

specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In

the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create

multiple types of interface, such as a

loopback interface (namely, the interface

whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet

interface, and PPP interface. Each interface

must have a unique interface name.

Hop Count 0 to 65535 - This parameter indicates the maximum

number of routers through which the

packets are transmitted. Hop Count is used

to indicate the overhead bytes that are

transmitted to the destination address. The

smaller the value, the less the overhead

bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same

destination address, a route whose overhead

is less is preferred to transmit the packets.

Working Status Working

Unworking

- This parameter indicates whether the

current IP route is available.

A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IPRoute Management Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.

Navigation Path



2. Click the IP Route Management tab.

3. Click New.

Parameters for Creating IP Routes


Destination

Address

- - This parameter specifies the destination

address of the packets. This parameter can

be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or

C only, but cannot be set to the IP address

of the local host or the loopback address

with the 127 field.

Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.

OptiX RTN 910




A-31




Gateway - - This parameter specifies the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the

NE is located, namely, the IP address of the

next hop of the packets.

A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPFParameter Settings

This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.

Navigation Path



2. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

OSPF Parameters


Area - - l The OSPF protocol supports the division

of NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEs

in the same area can transmit the OSPF

packets to each other to generate theroute.

l When setting the area for the NEs, you

need to set the NEs that run the OSPF

protocol to the same area.

DCC Hello Timer

(s)

1 to 255 1 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello

packet timer at the DCC interface.

l The Hello packets are used for detecting

the neighbor router on the network that is

connected to the router. By periodically

transmitting the hello packets, you can

determine whether the interface on the

neighbor router is still in the active status.

l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the

interval for the hello packet timer to

transmit the hello packets.

l In the case of two interconnected NEs,

DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the

same value.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




DCC Neighbor

Dead Time(s)

1 to 65535 6 l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

the dead time of a neighbor router at the

DCC interface.

l If the local router fails to receive the hello

packets from the connected neighbor

router within the time specified in DCC

Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers

that the neighbor router is unavailable.

l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be

set to a value that is a minimum of twice

the value of DCC Hello Timer(s).

l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC

Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to

the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally.

DCC

Retransmission

Timer(s)

1 to 65535 5 DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies

the interval for transmitting a request

through the DCC interface to retransmit the

link state advertisement (LSA) packets.

DCC Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time to

transmit the LSA packets through the

DCC interface.

l The LSA packets in the LSA database of

the local router are aged as the timeelapses, but are not aged when they are

being transmitted on the network. Hence,

before the LSA packets are transmitted,

you need to increase the age of the LSA

packets based on the value of DCC Delay

(s).

LAN Hello Timer

(s)

1 to 255 - l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello

packet timer at the LAN interfaces.

l The hello packets are used for detecting

the neighbor router on the network that is

connected to the router. By periodicallytransmitting the hello packets, you can

determine whether the interface on the

neighbor router is still in the active status.

l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the

interval for the hello packet timer of the

NE to transmit the hello packets.

l In the case of two interconnected NEs,

LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the

same value.

OptiX RTN 910




A-33




LAN Neighbor

Dead Time(s)

1 to 65535 - l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

the dead time of a neighbor router at the

LAN interface.

l If the local router fails to receive the hello

packets from the connected neighbor

router within the time specified in LAN

Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers

that the neighbor router is unavailable.

l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be

set to a value that is a minimum of two

times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead

Time(s).

l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC

Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set tothe same value. Otherwise, the OSPF

protocol fails to operate normally.

LAN

Retransmission

Timer(s)

1 to 65535 5 LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies

the time for transmitting a request for

retransmission of the LSA packets through

the LAN interface.

LAN Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time to

transmit the LSA packets through the

LAN interface.

l

The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time

elapses, but are not aged when they are

being transmitted on the network. Hence,

before the LSA packets are transmitted,

you need to increase the age of the LSA

packets based on the value of LAN Delay

(s).

A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARPThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Proxy ARP tab.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP


Proxy ARP Disabled

Enabled

Disabled l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the

same network segment but differentdomains to communicate with each other.

l To realize communication between such

NEs, the source NE sends the ARP

broadcast packet to address the route to

the destination NE. The NE with the

proxy ARP function enabled checks the

routing table after sensing the ARP

broadcast packet. If the routing table

contains the destination address that the

ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE

returns a ARP spoofing packet, whichenables the NE that sends the ARP

broadcast packet to consider that the

MAC address of the NE that returns the

ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address

of the destination NE. In this manner, the

packet that is to be sent to the destination

NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy

ARP function enabled and then

forwarded to the destination NE.

A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network LayerParameter

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol

model.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI


2. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.

Network Layer Parameters



NE.

OptiX RTN 910




A-35




Configuration Role L1

L2

L1 l Configuration Role cannot be set to

ES.

l An NE whose Configuration Role is setto L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an

NE in the other area. It uses a route in the

local area only and access the other area

by distributing the default route of the

nearest L2 NE.

l An NE whose Configuration Role is set

to L2 can function as a neighbor of an NE

in the other area and can use a route in the

backbone area. The backbone area is a

collection that is formed by consecutive

L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE of all the roles

must be consecutive (connected to each

other).

Current Role - - This parameter indicates the current role.

A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI


2. Click the Routing Table tab.

Parameters for Routing Tables


Port - - This parameter indicates the port used for

OSI communication.

Data Link Layer - - This parameter indicates the protocol that is

used at the data link layer.

Adjacency No. - - l This parameter specifies the identifier of

the adjacency that is set up by two NEs

through the OSI protocol. One adjacency

number corresponds to an OSI adjacency.

l The value is dynamically allocated by the

NE.

Adjacency Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the

adjacency.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






LAPD Actor User

Network

User l This parameter specifies the LAPD actor.

l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,

they can perform the LAPD negotiationonly when the LAPD actor is set to

User at one end and is set to Network at

the other end.

Efficient LAPD

Enable

- - This parameter indicates whether the

current LAPD is enabled.

Configurable

LAPD Enable

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled This parameter specifies whether the LAPD

is enabled.

LAPD Parameters


Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.

L2 Wait Time to

Retry(s)

1 to 20 1 l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time

to Retry(s).

l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the

interval for retransmitting packets at the

LAPD link layer.l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be

set according to the network situation. If

the network is in good situation, L2 Wait

Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller

value. Otherwise, it is recommended that

you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a

greater value.

l This parameter needs to be set according

to the planning information. In normal

cases, it is recommended that you use the

default value.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




L2 Retry Times 2 to 6 3 l This parameter specifies L2 Retry

Times.

l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximumnumber of packet retransmission

attempts at the LAPD link layer.

l L2 Retry Times needs to be set

according to the network situation. If the

network is in good situation, L2 Retry

Times can be set to a smaller value.

Otherwise, it is recommended that you

set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.



cases, it is recommended that you use thedefault value.

L3 Hello Timer(s) 1 to 100 3 l This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer

(s).

l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello

packet timer at the LAPD link network

layer. It is used for periodical

transmission of the Hello packets.

l The Hello timer determines the interval

for transmitting the Hello packets once.

L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set

according to the network situation. If thenetwork is in good situation, L3 Hello

Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.


set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.




default value.

OptiX RTN 910




A-39




L3 ES Timer(s) 1 to 200 50 l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer

(s).

l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ESconfiguration timer at the LAPD link

network layer. It is used for setting the

time to transmit the configuration

information on the ES route.

l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set according

to the network situation. If the network is

in good situation, L3 ES Timer(s) can be

set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is

recommended that you set L3 Hello

Timer(s) to a smaller value.

l

This parameter needs to be set accordingto the planning information. In normal


default value.

L3 IS Timer(s) 1 to 200 10 l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer

(s).

l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS

configuration timer at the LAPD link

network layer. It is used for setting the

time to transmit the configuration

information through the L1/L2 router.

l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set accordingto the network situation. If the network is

in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can be

set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is

recommended that you set L3 IS Timer

(s) to a smaller value.




default value.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




L3 Hold Timer(s) 2 to 63 5 l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer

(s).

l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the holdtimer at the LAPD link network layer.

l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set

according to the network situation. If the

network is in good situation, L3 Hold

Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.


set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.




default value.

COST 1 to 63 20 l This parameter specifies COST.

l COST indicates the overhead value of

the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the

OSI tunnel.

l The overhead value determines whether

this link is perverted. If the overhead

value is smaller, this link has a higher

priority to be selected.

l This parameter needs to set according to

the planning information.

A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_BandwidthManagement

This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCNManagement from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.

OptiX RTN 910




A-41






Enable Status Enabled

Disabled

Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the FE

or GE port is enabled.

l The inband DCN can transmit thenetwork management information over

the link only after the inband DCN

function is enabled at the FE or GE ports

at both ends of a link.

Parameters for Setting IF Ports


Port Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the IF port.

Enable Status Enabled

Disabled

Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the IF

port is enabled.

l The inband DCN can transmit the

network management information over

the link only after the IF ports at both ends

of a link are enabled on the inband DCN.

A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path

1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose

Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Protocol Settings tab.

Parameters for Setting a Protocol


Port - - Displays the port name.

OptiX RTN 910




A-43




Protocol Type IP

HWECC

IP l If the values of Protocol Type are

different from each other, the equipment

at both ends cannot be interconnected

with each other. Therefore, Protocol

Type must be set to the same value for

the equipment at both ends of a link.


to the planning information. Generally, it

is recommended that you set this

parameter to IP.

A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access

Control from the Function Tree.

Parameters for Ethernet Access Control


The First Network

Port

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled After The First Network Port is set to

Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can

access the NMS through the Ethernet port.

Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports


Enable Serial Port

Access

Selected

Deselected

Selected After Enable Serial Port Access is

selected, the NE can access the NMS or

command lines through the serial port.

Access Command

Line

Selected

Deselected

Deselected If Access Command Line is selected, the

serial interface can be used to access the

command line terminal.

Access NM Selected

Deselected

Selected If Access NM is selected, the serial interface

can be used to access the NMS.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Baud Rate 1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

57600

115200

9600 l This parameter specifies the data

transmission rate in the communications

through serial ports.

l This parameter is set according to the rate

of the serial port at the opposite end, and

the rates at both ends must be the same.

A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access


Parameters for LCT Access Control



NE.

OptiX RTN 910




A-45





A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the XPIC tab.

3. Click New.

Parameters


IF Channel

Bandwidth

28M

56M

- l This parameter specifies the working

bandwidth of the radio link.

l When this parameter is set to 56M, the

high-power ODU must be used.

Polarization

direction-V

- - l This parameter indicates the polarization

direction of a radio link.

l It is recommended that you set the IF port

on the IFX2 board that has a smaller slot

number to Link ID-V and the IF port on

the other IFX2 board to Link ID-H.

Polarization

direction-H

Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.

l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link

and is used to prevent the radio links

between sites from being wrongly

connected.

l When the link ID received by an NE is

different from the link ID set for the NE,

the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and

inserts the AIS.

l These two parameters are set according

to the planning information. These two parameters must be set to different

values, but Link ID-V must be set to the

same value at both ends of a link and Link

ID-H must also be set to the same value

at both ends of a link.

Link ID-H 2

OptiX RTN 910




A-47




Transmit Power

(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the transmit

power of an ODU. The value of this

parameter must not exceed the rated

power range supported by the ODU.

l The transmit power of the ODU must be

set to the same value at both ends of a

radio link.

l Consider the receive power of the ODU

at the opposite end when you set this

parameter. Ensure that the receive power

of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure

stable radio services.



Maximum

Transmit Power

(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the maximum

transmit power of the ODU. This

parameter cannot be set to a value that

exceeds the nominal power rang of the

ODU in the guaranteed capacity

modulation module..

l This parameter is set to limit the

maximum transmit power of the ODU

within this preset range.

l The maximum transmit power adjusted

by using the ATPC function should notexceed this value.



Transmission

Frequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates the channel

central frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not be

less than the sum of the lower transmit

frequency limit supported by the ODU

and a half of the channel spacing, and

must not be more than the difference between the upper transmit frequency

limit supported by the ODU and a half of

the channel spacing.




OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the

receive frequency of an ODU to prevent

mutual interference between the

transmitter and the receiver.

l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,

the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing

higher than the receive frequency. If

Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the

transmit frequency is one T/R spacing

lower than the receive frequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/R

spacing, set this parameter to 0,

indicating that the T/R spacing supported

by the ODU is used.

l A valid T/R spacing value is determined

by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing

should be set according to the technical

specifications of the ODU.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be

set to the same value at both the ends of

a radio link.

Transmission

Status

unmute

mute

unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, the

ODU does not transmit microwave

signals but can normally receivemicrowave signals.

l When this parameter is set to unmute, the

ODU normally transmits and receives

microwave signals.

l In normal cases, this parameter is set to

unmute.

OptiX RTN 910




A-49




ATPC Enabled Disabled

Enabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

ATPC function is enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabledand if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB

higher or lower than the central value

between the ATPC upper threshold and

the ATPC lower threshold at the receive

end, the receiver notifies the transmitter

to decrease or increase the transmit power

until the RSL is within the range that is 2

dB higher or lower than the central value


the ATPC lower threshold.

l The settings of the ATPC attributes must

be consistent at both ends of a radio link.

l In the case of areas where fast fading

severely affects the radio transmission, it


parameter to Disabled.

l During the commissioning process, set

this parameter to Disabled to ensure that

the transmit power is not changed. After

the commissioning, re-set the ATPC

attributes.

ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)

-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l The central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lower

threshold is set as the expected receive

power.

l It is recommended that you set ATPC

Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of

the planned central value between the

ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC

lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC

Lower Threshold(dBm) to the

difference between the planned central

value between the ATPC upper threshold

and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

l You can set the ATPC upper threshold

only when ATPC Automatic Threshold

Enable Status is set to Disabled.

ATPC Lower

Threshold(dBm)

-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0

ATPC Automatic

Threshold Enable

Status

Disabled

Enabled


automatic threshold function is enabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the

equipment automatically uses the preset

ATPC upper and lower thresholds

according to the work mode of the radio

link.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link


2. Click the XPIC tab.



Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.

Polarization

direction-V

- - This parameter indicates the IF port to which

the polarization direction V corresponds.

Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction V

corresponds.

Polarization

direction-H


the polarization direction H corresponds.

Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction H

corresponds.

IF Channel

Bandwidth

28M

56M

- l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the

channel spacing of the corresponding

radio links.



OptiX RTN 910




A-51




Power to Be

Received -V(dBm)

- - l This parameter is used to set the expected

receive power of the ODU and is mainly

used in the antenna alignment stage.

After this parameter is set, the NE

automatically enables the antenna

misalignment indicating function.

l When the antenna misalignment

indicating function is enabled, if the

actual receive power of the ODU exceeds

the range of receive power±3 dB, the

ODU LED of the IF board connected to

the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and

off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that

the antenna is not aligned.

l After the antenna alignment, after the

state that the antenna is aligned lasts for

30 minutes, the NE automatically

disables the antenna misalignment

indicating function.



Power to Be

Received -H(dBm)



used in the antenna alignment stage.

After this parameter is set, the NEautomatically enables the antenna


















OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Maximum

Transmit Power

(dBm)






modulation module..





by using the ATPC function should not

exceed this value.



Transmit Power

(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies the



exceeds the nominal power range of the

ODU.

l The transmit power of the ODU should

be set to the same value at both ends of a

radio link.



parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure




Transmission

Frequency(MHz)


transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,

the channel central frequency.


less than the sum of the lower TX

frequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, and

must not be more than the difference

between the upper TX frequency limit

supported by the ODU and a half of the

channel spacing.

l The difference between the transmit

frequencies of both the ends of a radio

link should be one T/R spacing.


to the planning information.

OptiX RTN 910




A-53




T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

spacing between the transmit frequency

and receive frequency of the ODU to

prevent mutual interference between the

transmitter and receiver.

l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the


higher than the receive frequency. If the

ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit

frequency is one T/R spacing lower than

the receive frequency.


spacing, this parameter is set to 0,


by the ODU is used.







radio link.

Transmission

Status

unmute

mute

unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the

transmit status of the ODU.

l If this parameter is set to mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not work but

can normally receive microwave signals.

l If this parameter is set to unmute, the

ODU can normally transmit and receive

microwave signals.


unmute.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration


Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.

Polarization

direction


the polarization direction H or the

polarization direction V corresponds.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




AM Enable Status Disabled

Enabled

Disabled l When this parameter is set to Disabled,

the radio link uses only the specified

modulation scheme. In this case, you

need to select Manually Specified

Modulation Mode.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,

the radio link uses the corresponding

modulation scheme according to the

channel conditions.

Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the

reliable transmission of the E1 services and

provide bandwidth adaptively for the

Ethernet services when the AM function is

enabled.

Modulation Mode

of the Guaranteed

AM Capacity

QPSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

- This parameter specifies the highest-gain

modulation scheme that the AM function

supports. This parameter is set according to

the planning information. Generally, the

value of this parameter is determined by the

bandwidth of the services that need to be

transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the

availability of the radio link that

corresponds to this modulation scheme.

NOTEModulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity

must be higher than Modulation Mode of the

Guaranteed AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AM

Enable Status is set to Enabled.

Modulation Mode

of the Full AM

Capacity

QPSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM








availability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.





Enable Status is set to Enabled.

OptiX RTN 910




A-55




Manually Specified

Modulation Mode

QPSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation

scheme that the radio link uses for signal

transmission.


Enable Status is set to Disabled.

Guaranteed E1

Capacity

- - l When AM Enable Status is set to

Enabled, this parameter depends on IF

Channel Bandwidth and Modulation

Mode of the Guaranteed AM

Capacity and cannot be set.

l When AM Enable Status is set to

Disabled, this parameter depends on IF

Channel Bandwidth and Manually

Specified Modulation Mode and cannot

be set.

E1 Capacity 1 to 75 - This parameter specifies the number of E1

services that can be transmitted in Hybrid

work mode. The value of this parameter

cannot exceed the Guaranteed E1

Capacity.

The E1 Capacity must be set to the same

value at both ends of a radio link.

Parameters for ATPC Management


Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




ATPC Enable

Status

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the


l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher

or lower than the central value between

the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC

lower threshold at the receive end, the

receiver notifies the transmitter to

decrease or increase the transmit power















attributes.


-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lower

threshold to a value for the expected

receive power.






Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference

between the planned central value


the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

l You can set this parameter only when

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable

Status is set to Disabled.

ATPC Lower

Threshold(dBm)

-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0

OptiX RTN 910




A-57




ATPC Automatic

Threshold Enable

Status

Disabled

Enabled


ATPC automatic threshold function is

enabled.





link.

l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you

need to manually set ATPC Upper

Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower

Threshold(dBm).

A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1

Protection from the Function Tree.

2. Click Create.



WTR time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-

restore (WTR) time.

l When the time after the former working

channel is restored to normal reaches the

set WTR time, a revertive switching

occurs.

l It is recommended that you use thedefault value.

Enabled Enabled

Disabled

Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the SD

switching function of N+1 protection is

enabled.


the SD condition is considered as a

trigger condition of protection switching.

l It is recommended that you set this

parameter to Enabled.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Slot Mapping Relation Parameters


Select Mapping

Direction

Work Unit

Protection Unit

Work Unit l This parameter specifies the mapping

direction of N+1 protection.



Select Mapping

Way

- - l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF

ports as Work Unit and map the

remaining IF port as Protection Unit.



Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the working unit

and protection unit that have been set.

A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1


Protection Group Parameters


Protection Group

ID

- - This parameter indicates the ID of the

protection group.

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

WTR time.



set WTR time, a revertive switchingoccurs.

l It is recommended that you use the

default value.

OptiX RTN 910




A-59




SD Enable Enabled

Disabled

- l This parameter indicates or specifies

whether the SD switching function of N

+1 protection is enabled.


the SD condition is considered as a

trigger condition of protection switching.



Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the

switching control protocol.

Protection Unit Parameters


Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protection unit.

Line - - This parameter indicates the information

about the working board or protection

board.

Switching Status - - This parameter indicates the switching state.

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protected unit.

Remote/Local End

Indication

- - This parameter indicates the local end or

remote end.

A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1


2. Click Create.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters


Working Mode HSB

FD

SD

HSB l This parameter specifies the working

mode of the IF 1+1 protection.

l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a

1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF

board and ODU at both ends of each hop

of a radio link to realize the protection.

l In FD mode, the system uses two

channels that have a frequency spacing

between them, to transmit and receive the

same signal. The remote end selects

signals from the two received signals.

With FD protection, the impact of the

fading on signal transmission is reduced.l In SD mode, the system uses two

antennas that have a space distance

between them, to receive the same signal.

The equipment selects signals from the

two received signals. With SD protection,

the impact of the fading on signal

transmission is reduced.

l The FD mode and SD mode are

compatible with the HSB switching

function.

l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Revertive Mode Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive

Mode

Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive

mode of the IF 1+1 protection.

l When this parameter is set to Revertive

Mode, the NE that is in the switching

state releases the switching and enables

the former working channel to return to

the normal state some time after the

former working channel is restored to

normal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-

Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the

switching state keeps the current state

unchanged unless another switching

occurs even though the former working

channel is restored to normal.


parameter to Revertive Mode.

OptiX RTN 910




A-61




WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-

restore (WTR) time.

l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches the


occurs.

l You can set WTR Time(s) only when

Revertive Mode is set to Revertive

Mode.


default value.

Enable Reverse

Switching

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the

reverse switching function is enabled.

l When both the main IF board and the

standby IF board at the sink end report

service alarms, they send the alarms to the

source end by using the MWRDI

overhead in the microwave frame. When

this parameter at the source end is set to

Enabled and the reverse switching

conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection

switching occurs at the source end.

l This parameter is valid only when

Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.

l In normal cases, it is recommended that

you set this parameter to Enabled.

Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working board

of the protection group.

Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protection

board of the protection group.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse

Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1



OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Protection Group Parameters


Protection Group

ID


protection group.

Working Mode HSB

FD

SD

HSB l This parameter indicates the working

mode of the created IF 1+1 protection

group.

l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a

1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF

board and ODU at both ends of each hop

of a radio link to realize the protection.

l In FD mode, the system uses two

channels that have a frequency spacing

between them, to transmit and receive thesame signal. The remote end selects

signals from the two received signals.

With FD protection, the impact of the

fading on signal transmission is reduced.

l In SD mode, the system uses two

antennas that have a space distance

between them, to receive the same signal.

The equipment selects signals from the

two received signals. With SD protection,

the impact of the fading on signal

transmission is reduced.

l The FD mode and SD mode are

compatible with the HSB switching

function.



Revertive Mode Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive

Mode

Revertive Mode l This parameter indicates or specifies the

revertive mode of the protection group.

l When this parameter is set to Revertive

Mode, the NE that is in the switching state

releases the switching and enables the

former working channel to return to thenormal state some time after the former

working channel is restored to normal.


Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the

switching state keeps the current state

unchanged unless another switching

occurs even though the former working

channel is restored to normal.


parameter to Revertive Mode.

OptiX RTN 910




A-63




WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter indicates or specifies the

WTR time.



occurs.


Revertive Mode is set to Revertive

Mode.

l It is recommended that you use the default

value.

Enable Reverse

Switching

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

whether the reverse switching function is

enabled.

l When both the main IF board and the

standby IF board at the sink end report

service alarms, they send the alarms to the

source end by using the MWRDI

overhead in the microwave frame. When

this parameter at the source end is set to

Enabled and the reverse switching

conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection

switching occurs at the source end.


Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.

Switching Status of

Device

- - l This parameter indicates the switching

state on the equipment side.

l Unknown is displayed when the

switching state on the channel side is not

queried or not obtained after a query.

Switching Status of

Channel

- - l This parameter indicates the switching

state on the channel side.

l Unknown is displayed when the

switching state on the channel side is not

queried or not obtained after a query.

Active Board of

Device

- - This parameter indicates the current

working board on the equipment side.

Active Board of

Channel

- - This parameter indicates the current

working board on the channel side.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable ReverseSwitching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





Unit - - This parameter indicates the working board

and protection board.

Slot Mapping

Relation

- - This parameter indicates the names and

ports of the working board and protection

board.

Working Status of

Device

- - This parameter indicates the working state

on the equipment side.

Signal Status of

Channel

- - This parameter indicates the status of the

link signal.

A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

Navigation Path

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link


2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

OptiX RTN 910




A-65



Parameters for Configuring the IF


Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK

2,4E1,3.5MHz,

16QAM

3,8E1,14MHz,QPS

K

4,8E1,7MHz,

16QAM

5,16E1,28MHz,QP

SK

6,16E1,14MHz,

16QAM

7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM

8,E3,28MHz,QPSK

9,E3,14MHz,

16QAM

10,22E1,14MHz,

32QAM

11,26E1,14MHz,

64QAM

12,32E1,14MHz,

128QAM

13,35E1,28MHz,

16QAM

14,44E1,28MHz,

32QAM

15,53E1,28MHz,

64QAM

- l This parameter indicates or specifies the

work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel

spacing, modulation mode" format.


planning information. The work modes

of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio

link must be the same.

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IFU2

board and the IFX2 board.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Enable AM Disabled

Enabled

Disable l When this parameter is set to Disabled,

the radio link uses only the specified



Modulation Mode.


the radio link uses the corresponding


channel conditions.





enabled.

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Channel Space 7M

14M

28M

56M

7M Channel Space indicates the channel

spacing of the corresponding radio link.

This parameter is set according to the



Guaranteed

Capacity

Modulation

QPSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gain


supports. This parameter is set according tothe planning information. Generally, the


service transmission bandwidth that the

Hybrid radio must ensure and the



This parameter is valid only when Enable

AM is set to Enabled.


OptiX RTN 910




A-67




Full Capacity

Modulation

QPSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM










NOTEFull Capacity Modulation must be higher than

Guaranteed E1 Capacity.


AM is set to Enabled.


Manually Specified

Modulation

QPSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM



transmission.


AM is set to Disabled.


Guaranteed E1

Capacity

- - l When Enable AM is set to Enabled, this

parameter depends on Channel Spaceand Guaranteed E1 Capacity and is not

configurable.

l When Enable AM is set to Disabled, this

parameter depends on Channel Space

and Manually Specified Modulation

Mode and is not configurable.


Specified Max E1

Capacity

- - This parameter specifies the number of E1

services that can be transmitted in the

Hybrid work mode. The value of this

parameter cannot exceed the Guaranteed

E1 Capacity.





OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies the

ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a

radio link, this parameter is used to

prevent incorrect connections of radio

links between sites.

l If the value of Received Radio Link ID

does not match the preset value of Link

ID at the local end, the local end inserts

the AIS signal to the downstream

direction of the service. At the same time,

the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to

the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do

not match.

l Each radio link of an NE should have a

unique link ID, and the link IDs at both

ends of a radio link should be the same.

Received Link ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates the received ID of

the radio link.

NOTEWhen the radio link becomes faulty, this

parameter is displayed as an invalid value.

ATPC Enable

Status

Disabled

Enabled


ATPC function is enabled. If the APTC

function is enabled, the transmit power of

the transmitter automatically varieswithin the specified ATPC range

according to the change of the RSL at the

receive end.








the commissioning, re-set the ATPCattributes.

ATPC Upper

Threshold(dBm)

-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPC

upper threshold and the ATPC lower


receive power.






OptiX RTN 910




A-69




ATPC Lower

Threshold(dBm)

-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 Lower Threshold(dBm) to the






(dBm) is set to Disabled.

ATPC AutomaticThreshold Enable

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC automatic threshold function is

enabled.





link.




Threshold(dBm).

Enable IEEE-1588

Timeslot

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with

the packet radio equipment, this parameter

is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter

is set to Disabled.



OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the

receive frequency of an ODU to prevent

interference between them.

l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,

the TX frequency is one T/R spacing

higher than the receive frequency. If

Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the

TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower

than the receive frequency.


spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating

that the T/R spacing supported by the

ODU is used.






set to the same value at both the ends of

a radio link.

Actual T/R

Spacing(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual T/R

spacing of the ODU.

TX Power(dBm) - - l

This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit power of the ODU. This


exceeds the nominal power range of the

ODU.

l This parameter cannot take a value

greater than the preset value of

Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).

l The transmit power of the ODU should

be set to the same value at both ends of a

radio link.

l

Consider the receive power of the ODUat the opposite end when you set this






TX High

Threshold(dBm)

- - l If the value of the actual transmit power

of the ODU is greater than the preset

value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the

system separately records the duration


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




TX Low Threshold

(dBm)

- - when the value of the actual transmit

power of the ODU is greater than the

preset value of TX High Threshold

(dBm) and the duration when the value

of the actual transmit power of the ODU

is greater than the preset value of TX Low

Threshold(dBm) in the performance

events.

l If the value of the actual transmit power


value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and

is lower than the preset value of TX High

Threshold(dBm), the system records the

duration when the value of the actual

transmit power of the ODU is greater thanthe preset value of TX Low Threshold

(dBm) in the performance events.


of the ODU is lower than the preset value

of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system

does not record it.

l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low

Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the


RX High

Threshold(dBm)

- - l If the value of the actual receive power of

the ODU is lower than the preset value of

RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system

records the duration when the value of the

actual receive power of the ODU is lower

than the preset value of RX Low

Threshold(dBm) and duration when the

value of the actual transmit power of the

ODU is lower than the preset value of RX

High Threshold(dBm)in the

performance events.

l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset value

of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is

lower than the preset value of RX High

Threshold(dBm), the system records the


receive power of the ODU is Lower than

the preset value of RX High Threshold


l If the value of the actual receive power of

the ODU is greater than the preset value

OptiX RTN 910




A-73




RX Low Threshold

(dBm)

- - of RX High Threshold(dBm), the

system does not record it.

Power to Be

Received(dBm)



used in the antenna alignment stage. After

this parameter is set, the NE












state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically



l This parameter needs to be according to

the planning.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Maximum

Transmit Power

(dBm)






modulation module.





by using the ATPC function should not

exceed this value.



Range of TX

Power(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the range of the

transmit power of the ODU.

Actual TX Power

(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates the actual


l If the ATPC function is enabled, the

queried actual transmit power may be

different from the preset value.

Actual RX Power

(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receive

power of the ODU.

TX Status Unmute

Mute

Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the


l When this parameter is set to Mute, the

transmitter of the ODU does not work but


l When this parameter is set to Unmute,

the ODU can normally transmit and

receive microwave signals.


you set this parameter to unmute.

Actual TX Status Unmute

Mute

- This parameter indicates the actual transmit

status of the ODU.

Equipment Information


Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band

where the ODU operates.

OptiX RTN 910




A-75




Equipment Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.

l PDH and SDH indicate the transmissioncapacity only and is irrelevant to the type

of transmitted service.

Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the

ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low

station.

l The transmit frequency of a Tx high

station is one T/R spacing higher than the

transmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing

serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU.

Transmission

Power Type

- - This parameter indicates the level of the

output power of the ODU.

A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).

A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.

A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.

A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LinearMS from the Function Tree.

2. Click Create.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





Protection Type 1+1 Protection

1:N Protection

1+1 Protection l This parameter specifies the protection

type of the linear MSP group.

l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one

working channel and one protection

channel are required. When the working

channel fails, the service is switched from

the working channel to the protection

channel.

l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working

channels and one protection channel are

required. Normal services are transmitted

on the working channels and extra

services are transmitted on the protectionchannel. When one working channel

fails, the services are switched from this

working channel to the protection

channel, and the extra services are

interrupted.

l If extra services need to be transmitted or

several working channels are required,

select 1:N Protection.



Switching Mode Single-Ended

Switching

Dual-Ended

Switching

Single-Ended

Switching (1+1

Protection)

Dual-Ended

Switching (1:N

Protection)

l This parameter specifies the switching

mode of the linear MSP.

l In single-ended mode, the switching

occurs only at one end and the state of the

other end remains unchanged.

l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs

at both ends at the same time.

l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N

Protection, Switching Mode can be set

to Dual-Ended Switching only.

OptiX RTN 910




A-77




Revertive Mode Non-Revertive

Revertive

Non-Revertive (1+1

Protection)

Revertive (1:NProtection)

l This parameter specifies the revertive

mode of the linear MSP.

l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching state


former working channel to return to the

normal state some time after the former



Revertive, the NE that is in the switching

state keeps the current state unchanged

unless another switching occurs even

though the former working channel is

restored to normal.


parameter to Revertive.


Protection, Revertive Mode can be set

to Revertive only.

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.



preset WTR time, a revertive switching

occurs.


Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.


default value.

SD Enable Enabled

Disabled


whether the switching at the SD alarm of

the linear MSP is enabled.


the B2_SD alarm is considered as a

switching condition.




OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Protocol Type New Protocol

Restructure Protocol

New Protocol l The new protocol is supported at the early

stage, and the mainstream protocol

version is used currently.

l The restructure protocol optimizes the

new protocol and provides better

measures to protect the new protocol,

thus ensuring that the new protocol runs

in a better manner.

l The new protocol is more mature, and the

restructure protocol complies with the

standard. It is recommended that you use

the new protocol.

l You must ensure that the interconnected

NEs run the protocols of the same type.



Select Mapping

Direction

West Working Unit

West Protection

Unit

West Working Unit This parameter specifies the mapping

direction of the linear MSP.

Select MappingMode

- - l

This parameter specifies the mapping board and port in the mapping direction.

l If the protection type is set to 1+1

Protection, only one line port can be

mapped as West Working Unit.

l Only one line port can be mapped as West

Protection Unit.

l The line port mapped as West Protection

Unit and the line port mapped as West

Working Unit should be configured for

different boards if possible.

Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the preset slot

mapping relations, including the mapping

direction and the corresponding mapping

mode.

A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.

OptiX RTN 910




A-79



Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS

from the Function Tree.



Protection Group

ID


protection group.

Protection Type 1+1 Protection

1:N Protection

- l This parameter indicates the protection

type of the linear MSP group.

l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one

working channel and one protection

channel are required. When the working

channel fails, the service is switched from

the working channel to the protection

channel.

l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working

channels and one protection channel are

required. Normal services are transmitted

on the working channels and extra

services are transmitted on the protection

channel. When one working channel

fails, the services are switched from this

working channel to the protection

channel, and the extra services areinterrupted.

l If extra services need to be transmitted or

several working channels are required,

select 1:N Protection.

Switching Mode Single-Ended

Switching

Dual-Ended

Switching


switching mode of the linear MSP.

l In single-ended mode, the switching

occurs only at one end and the state of the

other end remains unchanged.

l

In dual-ended mode, the switching occursat both ends at the same time.


Protection, Switching Mode can be set

to Dual-Ended Switching only.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





Revertive


revertive mode of the linear MSP.

l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching state


former working channel to return to the

normal state some time after the former



Revertive, the NE that is in the switching

state keeps the current state unchanged

unless another switching occurs even

though the former working channel is

restored to normal.




Protection, Revertive Mode can be set

to Revertive only.


WTR time.




occurs.




default value.

SD Enable Enabled

Disabled


whether the reverse switching function is

enabled.


the B2_SD alarm is considered as a

switching condition.



OptiX RTN 910




A-81




Protocol Type New Protocol

Restructure Protocol

- l The new protocol is supported at the early

stage, and the mainstream protocol

version is used currently.

l The restructure protocol optimizes the

new protocol and provides better

measures to protect the new protocol,

thus ensuring that the new protocol runs

in a better manner.

l You must ensure that the interconnected

NEs run the protocols of the same type.

l The new protocol is more mature, and the

restructure protocol complies with the

standard. It is recommended that you use

the new protocol.

Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the protocol status

of the linear MSP.



Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates that which of the

units, namely, the west protection unit or the

west working unit, is currently in the protection status.

West Line -

-

- This parameter indicates the west protection

unit and the west working unit of the linear

MSP.

West Switching

Status

- - This parameter indicates the switching

status of the line.

Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the working

channel protected by the current protection

channel.

Remote/Local End

Indication

- - When Switching Mode is set to Dual-

Ended Switching, the central office end

that issues the switching command is

displayed.

A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.

A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-

connections.

A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.

A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into

SNCP Services

This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP

services.

A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,

configuring cross-connections).

A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.

A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_CreationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-

connections.

Navigation Path

l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH

Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

l Click Create.

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Level VC12

VC3

VC4

VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the

service to be created.

l If the service is an E1 service or a data

service that is bound with VC-12

channels, set this parameter to VC12.

l If the service is a data service that is

bound with VC-3 channels, set this

parameter to VC3.

l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass

through the NE, set this parameter to

VC4.

OptiX RTN 910




A-83




Direction Bidirectional

Unidirectional

Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to

Unidirectional, create only the cross-

connections from the service source to the

service sink.

l When this parameter is set to

Bidirectional, create the cross-

connections from the service source to the

service sink and the cross-connections

from the service sink to the service

source.


you set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the

service source.

Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of

the VC-4 channel where the service

source is located.

l This parameter cannot be set when

Source Slot is set to the slot of the

tributary board.

Source Timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l This parameter indicates the timeslot

range of the service source.

l This parameter can be set to a number or

several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the

comma (,) to separate the discrete

numbers, or use the endash (-) to

represent a consecutive number. For

example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.



Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the

service sink.

Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of

the VC-4 channel where the service sink

is located.

l This parameter cannot be set when Sink

Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Sink Timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l This parameter specifies the timeslot

range of the service sink.

l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this

parameter to several numbers, use the





1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.



Activate

Immediately

Yes

No

Yes l This parameter specifies whether to

immediately activate the configuredservice.

l To immediately deliver the configured

SDH service to the NE, set this parameter

to Yes.

A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCPService Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.

Navigation Path

l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH


l Click Create SNCP Service.



Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the

service to be created is SNCP.

OptiX RTN 910




A-85




Direction Bidirectional

Unidirectional

Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to

Unidirectional, create only the cross-

connections from the SNCP service

source to the SNCP service sink.

l When this parameter is set to

Bidirectional, create the cross-

connections from the SNCP service

source to the service sink and the cross-

connections from the SNCP service sink

to the service source.


you set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Level VC12

VC3

VC4

VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the

SCNP service to be created.



channels, set this parameter to VC12.


bound with VC-3 channels, set this

parameter to VC3.


through the NE, set this parameter to

VC4.

Hold-off Time(100ms)

0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time.

l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching

can be performed on the NE after a delay

of time to prevent the situation where the

NE performs SNCP switching and other

protection switching at the same time.

l If multiple link-based protection

schemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection,

and N+1 protection, are available at the

same time, the hold-off time needs to be

set to a duration that is longer than theswitching duration for the multiple link-

based protection schemes.

l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it

is recommended that you set the hold-off

time to 0.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





Revertive

Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to

switch the service to the original working

channel after the fault is rectified.

l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the

service is switched from the protection

channel to the original working channel.

If this parameter is set to Non-

Revertive, the service is not switched

from the protection channel to the

original working channel.







occurs.




default value.


service source.



source is located.



tributary board.

Source Timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6)


range of the service source.


several numbers. When setting this

parameter to several numbers, use thecomma (,) to separate the discrete




1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.




service sink.

OptiX RTN 910




A-87




Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of

the VC-4 channel where the service sink

is located.



Sink Timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6)









example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.



Configure SNCP

Tangent Ring

Selected

Deselected

Deselected l After the Configure SNCP Tangent

Ring checkbox is selected, you can

quickly configure the SNCP service for

the SNCP ring tangent point.


you do not select this checkbox.

Activate

Immediately

Selected

Deselected

Selected l This parameter specifies whether toimmediately activate the configured

SNCP service.

l After the Activate Immediately

checkbox is selected, you can

immediately activate the created SNCP

service.

A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH ServiceConfiguration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services

This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP

services.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH


2. If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Right-

click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



3. Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to

SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.



Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the

service to be created is SNCP.

Direction Unidirectional - This parameter indicates the direction of the

SNCP service.

Level VC12

VC3

VC4

- l This parameter indicates the level of the

SNCP service.



channels, the parameter value is VC12.


bound with VC-3 channels, the parameter

value is VC3.


through the NE, the parameter value is

VC4.

Hold-off Time

(100ms)

0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of

the hold-off time.

l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching

can be performed on the NE after a delayof time to prevent the situation where the







set to a duration that is longer than the

switching duration for the multiple link-


l If only the SNCP scheme is available, itis recommended that you set the hold-off

time to 0.

OptiX RTN 910




A-89





Revertive

Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to

switch the service to the original working

channel after the fault is rectified. If this

parameter is set to "Revertive", the
















occurs.




default value.


service source.



source is located.



tributary board.

Source Timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6)


range of the service source.l This parameter can be set to a number or







1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.




OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





service sink.

Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink

is located.



Sink Timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6)






comma (,) to separate the discretenumbers, or use the endash (-) to



1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.



Configure SNCP

Tangent Ring

Selected

Deselected

Deselected l After the Configure SNCP Tangent

Ring checkbox is selected, you can

quickly configure the SNCP service for

the SNCP ring tangent point.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou do not select this checkbox.

Activate

Immediately

Selected

Deselected

Selected l This parameter specifies whether to

immediately activate the configured

SNCP service.

l After the Activate Immediately

checkbox is selected, you can

immediately activate the created SNCP

service.

A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,

configuring cross-connections).

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service


OptiX RTN 910




A-91





Parameters for Automatically Generated Cross-Connections


Level VC12

VC3

VC4


service.



channels, VC12 is displayed.


bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is

displayed.


through the NE, VC4 is displayed.

Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

service source.

Source Timeslot/

Path

- - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

timeslot range of the service source.

Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

source sink.

Sink Timeslot/

Path

- - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

timeslot range of the service sink.

Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this

parameter.

Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this

parameter.

Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this

parameter.

A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service




Service Type - - This parameter indicates the service

protection type of the protection group.

OptiX RTN 910




A-93




Source - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service source and protection

service source of the protection group are

located.

Sink - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service sink and protection

service sink of the protection group are

located.

Level VC12

VC3

VC4


service.



channels, VC12 is displayed.


bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is

displayed.


through the NE, VC4 is displayed.

Current Status - - This parameter indicates the current

switching mode and switching status of the

services of the protection group.

Revertive Mode Revertive

Non-Revertive


revertive mode of the service.l This parameter determines whether to

switch the service from the protection

channel to the original working channel

after the fault is rectified.











OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





WTR time.



occurs.




default value.

Hold-off Time

(100ms)

0 to 100 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

duration of the hold-off time.

l

When a line is faulty, SNCP switchingcan be performed on the NE after a delay

of time to prevent the situation where the







set to a duration that is longer than the

switching duration for the multiple link-


l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it

is recommended that you set the hold-off

time to 0.

OptiX RTN 910




A-95




Initiation

Condition

TIM

EXC

SD

UNEQ

Null

Null l This parameter indicates or specifies the

conditions that trigger the protection

switching of the service.

l If TIM is selected, the SNCP service

considers the HP_TIM alarm as an

automatic switching condition.

l If EXC is selected, the SNCP service

considers the B3_EXC or BIP _EXC

alarm as an automatic switching

condition.

l If SD is selected, the SNCP service

considers the B3_SD or BIP_SD alarm as

an automatic switching condition.

l If UNEQ is selected, the SNCP serviceconsiders the HP_UNEQ or LP_UNEQ

alarm as an automatic switching

condition.

l It is recommended that you set Initiation

Condition to the same condition for

Working Service and Protection

Service.

l The protection switching conditions in

Initiation Condition are optional values

not included in the default values, and

they are set according to the planninginformation.

Trail Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the

working service and protection service of

the protection group.

Service Grouping - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this

parameter.

Active Channel - - This parameter indicates whether the

working service or protection service is

currently received by the protection group.

A.7 Clock ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet

This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.

A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.

A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.

A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.

A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.

A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.

A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source

This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock

source.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >

Clock Source Priority.

2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

OptiX RTN 910




A-97



Parameters


Clock Source - - l External clock source 1

indicates the externalclock source at the

CLK or TIME port on

the CSTA, CSHA,

CSHB, or CSHC board

in physical slot 1.

l The internal clock

source is always at the

lowest priority and

indicates that the NE

works in the free-run

mode.l The clock sources and

the corresponding

clock source priority

levels are determined

according to the clock

synchronization

schemes.

External Clock Source

Mode

2Mbit/s

2MHz

2Mbit/s l This parameter

indicates the type of the

external clock source

signal.l This parameter is set

according to the

external clock signal.

In normal cases, the

external clock signal is

a 2 Mbit/s signal.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid

only when External

Clock Source Mode is

set to 2Mbit/s.

l This parameter

indicates which bit of

the TS0 in odd frames

of the external clock

signal is used to

transmit the SSM.

l This parameter needs to

be set only when the

SSM or extended SSM

is enabled. In normal

cases, the external

clock sources use the

SA4 to transmit the

SSM.

Clock Source Priority

Sequence (1 is the

highest)

- - Displays the priority

sequence of clock sources.

1 indicates the highest

clock source priority.

A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet

This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.

Navigation Path


Clock Subnet Configuration.

2. Click the Clock Subnet tab.

Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet


Affiliated Subnet 0 to 255 0 l This parameter is used

when the clock subnet

needs to be created on

the NMS.

l The NEs that trace the

same clock source

should be allocated

with the same clock

subnet ID.

OptiX RTN 910




A-99




Protection Status Start Extended SSM

Protocol

Start Standard SSMProtocol

Stop SSM Protocol

Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is a

scheme used for

synchronous

management on an

SDH network and

indicates that the SSM

is passed by the lower

four bits of the S1 byte

and can be exchanged

between the nodes. The

SSM protocol ensures

that the equipment

automatically selects

the clock source of the

highest quality andhighest priority, thus

preventing mutual

clock tracing.

l After the standard SSM

protocol is started, the

NE first performs the

protection switching on

the clock source

according to the clock

quality level

information provided

by the S1 byte. If thequality level of the

clock source is the

same, the NE then

performs the protection

switching according to

the clock priority table.

That is, the NE selects

an unlocked clock

source that is of the

highest quality and

highest priority from all

the current available

clock sources as the

clock source to be

synchronized and

traced by the local

station.

l If the SSM protocol is

stopped, it indicates

that the S1 byte is not

used. The NE selects

and switches a clock


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






Clock Source ID (None)

1 to 15

(None) l This parameter is valid

only when the extended

SSM protocol is

started.

l Clock source IDs are

allocated for the

following clock

sources only:

– External clock

source

– Internal clock source

of the node that

accesses the external

clock sources– Internal clock source

of the joint node of a

ring and a chain or

the joint node of two

rings

– Line clock source

that enters the ring

when the intra-ring

line clock source is

configured at the

joint node of a ring

and a chain or the

joint node of two

rings

A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality

This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >


2. Click the Clock Quality tab.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters for Clock Source Quality


Clock Source - - This parameter indicates

the name of theconfigured clock source.

In Clock Source

Priority, you can set

whether to add or delete a

clock source.

Configuration Quality Unknown

Synchronization Quality

G.811 Clock Signal

G.812 Transit Clock

SignalG.812 Local Clock Signal

G.813 SDH Equipment

Timing Source (SETS)

Signal

Do Not Use For

Synchronization

Automatic Extraction

Automatic Extraction This parameter specifies

the quality level that is

configured for the clock

source. This function is

required only in a special

scenario or in a test.Generally, this parameter

need not be set.

Clock Quality - - This parameter indicates

the clock source quality

signal received by the NE.The NE extracts the clock

source quality signal from

the S1 byte of each clock

source.

Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level


NE Name - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the NE.

OptiX RTN 910




A-103




Manual Setting of 0

Quality Level

Do Not Use For

Synchronization

G.811 Reference Clock Between G.811 Reference

Clock and G.812 Transit

Clock

G.812 Transit Clock

Between G.812 Transit

Clock and G.812 Local

Clock

G.812 Local Clock

Between G.812 Local

Clock and synchronousequipment timing source

(SETS)

SETS Clock

Between synchronous

equipment timing source

(SETS) and quality

unavailable

Do Not Use For

Synchronization

This parameter specifies

the clock quality whose

level is manually set to

zero.

l Do Not Use For

Synchronization: the

notification

information in the

reverse direction of the

selected

synchronization clock

source to avoid direct

mutual locking of

adjacent NEs.

l G.811 Reference

Clock: the clock signal

specified in ITU-T G.

811.

l Between G.811

Reference Clock and

G.812 Transit Clock:

lower than the quality

level of the clock signal

specified in ITU-T G.

811 but higher than the

quality level of thetransit exchange clock

signal specified in ITU-

T G.812.

l G.812 Transit Clock:

the transit exchange

clock signal specified

in ITU-T G.812.

l Between G.812 Transit

Clock and G.812 Local

Clock: lower than the

quality level of thetransit exchange clock


T G.812 but higher than

the quality level of the

local exchange clock


T G.812.

l G.812 Local Clock: the

local exchange clock


T G.812.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




l Between G.812 Local

Clock and synchronous

equipment timing

source (SETS): lower

than the quality level of

the local exchange

clock signal specified

in ITU-T G.812 but

higher than the quality


of the SETS.

l SETS Clock: the clock

signal of the SETS.

l Between synchronous

equipment timing

source (SETS) and

quality unavailable:

lower than the quality


of the SETS but higher

than the quality level

unavailable in the

synchronous timing

source.

A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM OutputControl

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.

Navigation Path



2. Click the SSM Output Control tab.

OptiX RTN 910




A-105



Parameters


Line Port - - l This parameter

indicates the name of the line clock port.

l Line Port: indicates

the SSM quality

information output port

of the current available

line clock source and

the external clock

source. This output port

can transmit the quality

information of the

clock source byoutputting the S1 byte

to the downstream NE.

Control Status Enabled

Disabled

Enabled l This parameter is valid

only when the SSM

protocol or the

extended SSM protocol

is started.

l This parameter

indicates whether the

SSM is output at the

line port.l When the line port is

connected to an NE in

the same clock subnet,

set this parameter to

Enabled. Otherwise,


Disabled.

A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock IDEnabling Status

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Clock ID Status tab.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters


Line Port - - l This parameter

indicates the name of the line clock port.

l Line Port: indicates

the SSM quality

information output port

of the current available

line clock source and

the external clock

source. This output port

can transmit the quality

information of the

clock source byoutputting the S1 byte

to the downstream NE.

Enabled Status Enabled

Disabled

Enabled l This parameter is valid

only when the extended

SSM protocol is

started.

l This parameter

indicates whether the

clock source ID is

output at the line port.

l If the line ports areconnected to the NEs in

the same clock subnet

and if the extended

SSM protocol is started

on the opposite NE, this

parameter is set to

Enabled. Otherwise,


Disabled.

A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_ClockSource Restoration Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.

Navigation Path


Clock Source Switching.

2. Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.

OptiX RTN 910




A-107



Parameters



the name of the NE.

Higher Priority Clock

Source Reversion Mode

Auto-Revertive

Non-Revertive

Auto-Revertive l When the quality of a

higher-priority clock

source degrades, the

NE automatically

switches the clock

source to a lower-

priority clock source. If


Auto-Revertive, the

NE automatically

switches the clock source to the higher-

priority clock source

when this higher-

priority clock source

restores. If this

parameter is set to Non-

Revertive, the NE does

not automatically

switch the clock source

to the higher-priority

clock source when this

higher-priority clock source restores.

l Correct setting of

Clock Source

Switching Condition

ensures the reliability

of the clock source

switching. To improve

the clock quality, select

Auto-Revertive.

Otherwise, to prevent

jitter of the clock,generally, it is



Non-Revertive.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Clock Source WTR

Time(min.)

0 to 12 5 l This parameter

specifies the duration

from the time when the

clock source

restoration is detected

to the time when the

clock source switching

is triggered. This

parameter is used to

avoid frequent

switching of the clock

source due to

unstability of the clock

source state within a

short time.l This parameter is valid

only when Higher

Priority Clock Source

Reversion Mode is set

to Auto-Revertive.

A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock

Source Switching This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.

Navigation Path


Clock Source Switching.

2. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.

Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value DescriptionClock Source - - This parameter indicates

the name of the clock

source.

Effective Status Valid

Invalid


whether the clock source

is valid.

OptiX RTN 910




A-109




Lock Status Lock

Unlock

- l This parameter

specifies the locking

status of the clock

source in the priority

table.

l Lock: A clock source in

the priority table is in

the locked state. The

clock source in the

locked state cannot be

switched.

l Unlock: A clock source

in the priority table is in

the unlocked state. The

clock source in the

unlocked state can be

switched.

Switching Source - - This parameter indicates

the clock source to be

traced by the NE after the

switching.

Switching Status Normal

Manual Switching

Forced Switching


the switching status of the

current clock source.

A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of theExternal Clock Source

This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock

source.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >

Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock .

Parameters


2M Phase-Locked

Source Number

External Clock Source 1 - This parameter indicates

the number of the external

clock source output of the

NE.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




External Clock Output

Mode

2Mbit/s

2MHz

2Mbit/s l This parameter

specifies the mode of

the output clock.


be set according to the

requirements of the

interconnected

equipment. Generally,

the output external

clock signal is a 2 Mbit/

s signal.

External Clock Output

Timeslot

SA4 to SA8

ALL

ALL l This parameter is valid

only when External

Clock Output Mode isset to 2Mbit/s.

l This parameter

indicates which bit of

the TS0 in odd frames

of the output clock

signal is used to

transmit the SSM.


to ALL, it indicates

that all the bits of the

TS0 are used totransmit the SSM.

l It is recommended that

you use the default

value.

OptiX RTN 910




A-111




External Source Output

Threshold

Threshold Disabled

Not Inferior to G.813

SETS Signal Not Inferior to G.812

Local Signal


Transit Clock Signal


Clock Signal

Threshold Disabled l This parameter

specifies the lowest

quality of the output

clock. If the clock

quality is lower than the

value of this parameter,

it indicates that the

external clock source

does not output any

clock signal.


to Threshold

Disabled, it indicates

that the external clock

source always outputsthe clock signal.


you use the default

value.

2M Phase-Locked

Source Fail Condition

No Failure Condition

AIS

LOF

AIS OR LOF

No Failure Condition l This parameter

specifies the failure

condition of the 2 Mbit/

s phase-locked clock

source.

l

It is recommended thatyou use the default

value.

2M Phase-Locked

Source Fail Action

Shut Down Output

2M Output S1 Byte

Unavailable

Send AIS

Shut Down Output l This parameter is valid

only when 2M Phase-

Locked Source Fail

Condition is not set to

No Failure Condition.

l This parameter

specifies the operation

of the 2 Mbit/s phase-

locked loop (PLL)when the 2 Mbit/s

phase-locked clock

source meets the failure

conditions.


you use the default

value.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Clock > Clock

Synchronization Status.

Parameters



the name of the NE.

NE Clock Working

Mode

- - This parameter indicates

the working mode of the

NE clock.

S1 Byte Synchronization

Quality Information


the synchronization

quality information of the

S1 byte.

S1 Byte Synchronous

Source


the clock synchronization

source of the S1 byte.

Synchronous Source - - This parameter indicatesthe synchronization

source.

OptiX RTN 910




A-113




Data Output Method in

Holdover Mode

Normal Data Output

Mode

Keep the Latest Data

Normal Data Output

Mode

l When all the reference

timing signals are lost,

the slave clock changes

to the holdover mode.

At this time, the slave

clock works based on

the latest frequency

information stored

before the reference

timing signals are lost.

Then, the frequency of

the oscillator drifts

slowly to ensure that

the offset between the

frequency of the slaveclock and the reference

frequency is very

small. As a result, the

impact caused by the

drift is limited within

the specified

requirement.

l Normal Data Output

Mode: The slave clock

works based on the

latest frequency

information stored before the reference

timing signals are lost,

and the holdover

duration depends on the

size of the phase-

locked clock register on

the equipment. The

holdover duration can

be up to 24 hours.

l Keep the Latest Data:

The slave clock worksin holdover mode all

the time based on the

latest frequency

information stored

before the reference

timing signals are lost.

A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)

service.

A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line ServiceThis topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.

A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.

A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-

LAN) service.

A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.

A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.

A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)

service.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet

Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.

2. Click New.



Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the E-Line

service.

Service Name - - This parameter specifies

the name of the E-Line

service.

Direction UNI-UNI

UNI-NNI

NNI-NNI

UNI-UNI l This parameter

specifies the direction

of the E-Line service.


according to the


OptiX RTN 910




A-115




BPDU Not Transparently

Transmitted

TransparentlyTransmitted

Not Transparently

Transmitted

l This parameter

specifies the

transparent

transmission ID of the

bridge protocol data

unit (BPDU) packets. It

is used to indicate

whether the E-Line

service transparently

transmits the BPDU

packets.

l If the BPDU packets

are used as the service

packets and

transparentlytransmitted to the

opposite end, set this

parameter to

Transparently

Transmitted.

l In other cases, set this

parameter to Not

Transparently

Transmitted.


according to the planning information.

MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this

parameter.

Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this

parameter.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Source Port - - l This parameter is valid

only when Direction is

set to UNI-UNI or

UNI-NNI.

l Before setting this

parameter, check and

ensure that the

attributes in Ethernet

Interface of the port

are set correctly and are

the same as the


l The value of this

parameter cannot be the

same as the value of

sink port.

l The value of this

parameter cannot be

used for the E-LAN

port.


according to the


OptiX RTN 910




A-117




Source VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be

set to null, a number, or

several numbers. When

setting this parameter

to several numbers, use

the comma (,) to

separate the discrete

numbers, or use the

endash (-) to represent

a consecutive number.

For example, the

numbers 1, and 3-6

indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and

6.

l This parameter is validonly when Direction is

set to UNI-UNI or

UNI-NNI.

l The number of VLANs

must be the same value

of Sink VLANs.

Otherwise, you need to

create a VLAN

forwarding table for

swapping VLAN IDs.

l If this parameter is setto null, all the services

at the source port are

used as the service

source.

l If this parameter is not

set to null, only the

service that contains

the VLAN ID at the

source port can be used

as the service source.

Bearer Type QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link tocarry the E-Line

service.



set to UNI-NNI.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




QinQ Link ID - - l Selects the QinQ link

ID.

l A QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link .



set to UNI-NNI.

Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to

carry the E-Line

service.



set to NNI-NNI.

QinQ Link ID 1 - - l Selects the QinQ link

ID of the first QinQ

link.



set to NNI-NNI.

l The QinQ link ID is

preset in QinQ Link .

Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to

carry the E-Lineservice.



set to NNI-NNI.

QinQ Link ID 2 - - l Selects the QinQ link

ID of the second QinQ

link.



set to NNI-NNI.

l The QinQ link ID is

preset in QinQ Link .

OptiX RTN 910




A-119




Sink Port - - l Before setting this

parameter, check and

ensure that the

attributes in Ethernet

Interface of the port

are set correctly and are

the same as the


l The value of this

parameter cannot be the

same as the value of

Source Port.

l The value of this

parameter cannot be

used for the E-LAN

port.


according to the


Sink VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be





the comma (,) toseparate the discrete

numbers, or use the



For example, the

numbers 1, and 3-6


6.

l The number of VLANs

must be the same value

of Source VLANs.


to null, all the services

at the sink port are used

as the service sink.



service that contains

the VLAN ID at the

sink port can be used as

the service sink.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet




Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter indicates

the ID of the E-Line

service.

Service Name - - This parameter indicates

or specifies the name of

the E-Line service.

Source Node - - This parameter indicates

the source node.

Sink Node - - This parameter indicates

the sink node.


not support this

parameter.

MTU(byte) 1518 to 9600 - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this

parameter.

OptiX RTN 910




A-121






VLANs 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates

or specifies the VLAN ID

of the UNI port.

l This parameter can be





the comma (,) to


numbers, or use the



For example, the

numbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and

6.



set to UNI-UNI or

UNI-NNI in the

process of creating an

E-Line service.



of the UNI work as theservice source or

service sink.



services of the UNI port

whose VLAN IDs are

included in the set

value of this parameter

work as the service

source or service sink.

OptiX RTN 910




A-123



Parameters Associated with NNI Ports


QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - l This parameter

indicates the QinQ link ID of the QinQ link

connected to the NNI

port.



set to UNI-UNI or

UNI-NNI in the


E-Line service.

Port - - l This parameter

indicates the NNI port.



set to UNI-UNI or

UNI-NNI in the


E-Line service.

S-VLAN ID - - l This parameter

indicates or specifies

the VLAN ID of the

NNI port.



set to UNI-NNI or

NNI-NNI in the


E-Line service.

l This parameter is preset

in QinQ Link .

Parameters for the Port Attributes


Port - - This parameter indicates

the QinQ link ID of the

QinQ link connected to

the port.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Enable Port - - l This parameter

indicates whether to

enable the port.


in General Attributes

of Ethernet Interface.

Encapsulation Type Null

802.1Q

QinQ

- l This parameter

indicates the

encapsulation type of

the port.



set to UNI-UNI or

UNI-NNI in the process of creating an

E-Line service.


to Null, the port

transparently transmits

the received packets.


to 802.1Q, the port

identifies the packets

that comply with the

IEEE 802.1Q standard.l If this parameter is set

to QinQ, the port

identifies the packets

that comply with the

IEEE 802.1 QinQ

standard.


in General Attributes

of Ethernet Interface.

TAG Tag Aware

Access

Hybrid

l This parameter

indicates the tag of the

port.


in Layer 2 Attributes

of Ethernet

Interface .

OptiX RTN 910




A-125



A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding TableItem_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.

Navigation Path



2. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.

3. Click New.

Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item


Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies

the network attribute of

the source interface.

Source Interface - - This parameter specifies

the source interface.

Source VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID of the

source service.

Sink Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies

the network attribute of the sink interface.

Sink Interface - - This parameter specifies

the sink interface.

Sink VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID of the sink

service.

NOTE

l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is

created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in

Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.

l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from

Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the

other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.

l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of

VLAN IDs.

A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Navigation Path


Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.

2. Click New.



Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter

specifies the ID of the

E-LAN service.

l The OptiX RTN 910

supports simultaneous

creation of an E-LAN

service only.


the name of the E-LAN

service.

BPDU - - l This parameter

indicates the

transparent

transmission tag of the

BPDU packets.

l In the case of an E-

LAN service, this parameter supports

only transparent

transmission of the

BPDU packets and

cannot be set manually.

l Not Transparently

Transmitted indicates

that the BPDU packets

are used as the protocol

packets to compute the

spanning tree topology

of the network.

OptiX RTN 910




A-127




Tag Type C-Awared

S-Awared

Tag-Transparent

C-Awared l C-Awared indicates

that the packets are

learnt according to C-

Tag (the VLAN tag on

the client-side). To

create the 802.1q

bridge, set this

parameter to C-

Awared.

l S-Awared indicates


learnt according to S-

Tag (the VLAN tag at

the carrier service

layer). To create the802.1ad bridge, set this

parameter to S-

Awared.

l Tag-Transparent

indicates that only the

Ethernet packets that

do not contain VLAN

tags are accessed. To

create the 802.1d

bridge, set this

parameter to Tag-

Transparent.


according to the



OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Self-Learning MAC

Address

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled l This parameter


enable the MAC

address self-learning

function.

l If the MAC self-

learning function of an

Ethernet LAN is

enabled, the Ethernet

LAN learns an MAC

address according to

the original MAC

address in the packet

and automatically

refreshes the MACaddress forwarding

table.

l If the MAC self-


Ethernet LAN is

disabled, a static MAC

address forwarding

table needs to be

configured. Otherwise,

the Ethernet LAN fails

to forward the services.

MAC Address Learning

Mode

- - l This parameter

indicates the mode used

to learn an MAC

address.

l When the bridge uses

the SVL mode, all the

VLANs share one

MAC address table. If

the bridge uses the IVL

mode, each VLAN has

an MAC address table.


not support this

parameter.


not support this

parameter.

OptiX RTN 910




A-129



Parameters for UNIs



the UNI port.

SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

specifies the S-VLAN

ID of the UNI port.


only when Tag Type is

set to S-Awared.


according to the


VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

specifies the VLAN ID

of the UNI port.






the comma (,) to


numbers, or use the

endash (-) to representa consecutive number.

For example, the

numbers 1, and 3-6


6.



of the UNI work as the

service source or

service sink.

l

If this parameter is notset to null, only the

services of the UNI port

whose VLAN IDs are

included in the set

value of this parameter

work as the service

source or service sink.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters of NNIs






set to S-Awared.

SVLANs - - l This parameter


ID of the NNI port.



set to S-Awared.

Parameters for the Split Horizon Group


Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter

indicates the ID of the

split horizon group.

l The default split

horizon group ID is 1

and cannot be setmanually.

OptiX RTN 910




A-131




Split Horizon Group

Member

- - l A split horizon group

member indicates the

logical port member in

the split horizon group.

l The port members that

are added to the same

split horizon group

cannot communicate

with each other.

l The OptiX RTN 910

supports only the

division of the split

horizon group

members according to

the Ethernet physical

port.

l If a UNI or NNI logical

port of the 802.1ad

bridge is added to a

split horizon group

member, the physical

port that is mounted

with the logical port is

automatically added to

the split horizon group

member.

A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.



Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter


E-LAN service.

l The supports

simultaneous creation

of an E-LAN service

only.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





the name of the E-LAN

service.

BPDU - - l This parameter

indicates the

transparent

transmission tag of the

BPDU packets.

l In the case of an E-

LAN service, this

parameter supports

only transparent

transmission of the

BPDU packets andcannot be set manually.

l Not Transparently

Transmitted indicates

that the BPDU packets

are used as the protocol

packets to compute the

spanning tree topology

of the network.

OptiX RTN 910




A-133




Tag Type C-Awared

S-Awared

Tag-Transparent

C-Awared l C-Awared indicates


learnt according to C-

Tag (the VLAN tag on

the client-side). To

create the 802.1q

bridge, set this

parameter to C-

Awared.

l S-Awared indicates


learnt according to S-

Tag (the VLAN tag at

the carrier service

layer). To create the802.1ad bridge, set this

parameter to S-

Awared.

l Tag-Transparent

indicates that only the

Ethernet packets that

do not contain VLAN

tags are accessed. To

create the 802.1d

bridge, set this

parameter to S-

Awared.

Self-Learning MAC

Address

Enabled Enabled l This parameter

indicates whether to

enable the MAC

address self-learning

function.

l If the MAC self-


Ethernet LAN is

enabled, the Ethernet

LAN learns an MACaddress according to

the original MAC

address in the packet

and automatically

refreshes the MAC

address forwarding

table.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




MAC Address Learning

Mode


indicates the mode used

to learn an MAC

address.

l When the bridge uses

the SVL mode, all the

VLANs share one

MAC address table. If

the bridge uses the IVL

mode, each VLAN has

an MAC address table.


not support this

parameter.


not support this

parameter.

Parameters for UNIs



the UNI port.



ID of the UNI port.



set to S-Awared.


according to the


OptiX RTN 910




A-135




VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter


of the UNI port.






the comma (,) to


numbers, or use the



For example, the

numbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and

6.


to null, the E-LAN

service exclusively

uses the corresponding

UNI physical port. That

is, the entire port is

mounted to the bridge.


to a non-null value,only the corresponding

UNI port whose service

packets contain this

VLAN ID works as the

logical port and is

mounted to the bridge.

Parameters for NNIs






set to S-Awared.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




SVLANs - - l This parameter


ID of the UNI port.



set to S-Awared.






the comma (,) to


numbers, or use the



For example, the

numbers 1, and 3-6


6.

Parameters for Static MAC Addresses


VLAN ID - 1 l This parameter is

invalid if MAC

Address Learning

Mode is SVL. That is,

the preset static MAC

address entries are

valid for all VLANs.

l If MAC Address

Learning Mode is set

to IVL, the preset static

MAC address entriesare valid for only the

VLANs whose VLAN

ID is equal to the preset

VLAN ID.


according to the


OptiX RTN 910




A-137




MAC Address - - l This parameter


the static MAC

address.

l A static MAC address

is an address that is set

manually. It is not aged

automatically and

needs to be deleted

manually.

l Generally, a static

MAC address is used

for the port that

receives but does not

forward Ethernet

service packets or the

port whose MAC

address need not be

aged automatically.

Egress Interface - - l This parameter

specifies the Ethernet

port that corresponds to

the MAC address.




OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address


VLAN ID - 1 l This parameter is

invalid if MACAddress Learning

Mode is SVL. That is,

the preset self-learning

MAC address entries

are valid for all

VLANs.

l If MAC Address

Learning Mode is set

to IVL, the preset self-

learning MAC address

entries are valid for only the VLANs whose

VLAN ID is equal to

the preset VLAN ID.


according to the




the self-learning MAC

address. A self-

learning MAC addressis also called a dynamic

MAC address.

l A self-learning MAC

address is an entry

obtained by a bridge in

SVL or IVL learning

mode. A self-learning

MAC address can be

aged.

Egress Interface - - l This parameter

specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to

the MAC address.


according to the


OptiX RTN 910




A-139



Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning


Aging Ability Enabled

Disabled

Enabled The OptiX RTN 910

supports enabling/disabling of the aging

function and aging time

for the MAC address

table.

If one routing entry is not

updated in a certain

period, that is, if no new

packet from this MAC

address is received to

enable the re-learning of

this MAC address, this

routing entry is

automatically deleted.

This mechanism is called

aging, and this period is

called aging time. The

aging time of a MAC

address table is 5 minutes

by default.

Aging Time(min) - 5

Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses


VLAN ID - 1 This parameter indicates

or specifies the VLAN ID

of the service. A disabled

MAC address is valid for

the VLAN whose VLAN

ID is equal to the preset

VLAN ID.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





specifies or indicates

the disabled MAC

address. A disabled

MAC address is also

called a blacklisted

MAC address.

l This parameter is used

for discarding an entry,

also called a black hole

entry, whose data

frame that contains a

specific destination

MAC address. A

disabled MAC addressneeds to be set

manually and cannot be

aged.

Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing


Frame Type Unicast

Multicast

1 This parameter indicates

the type of the receivedunknown frame.

Handing Mode Discard

Broadcast

Broadcast Selects the method of

processing the unknown

frame. If this parameter is

set to Discard, the

unknown frame is directly

discarded. If this

parameter is set to

Broadcast, the unknown

frame is broadcast at the

forwarding port.

OptiX RTN 910




A-141



Parameters for the Split Horizon Group


Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter

indicates the ID of thesplit horizon group.

l The default split

horizon group ID is 1

and cannot be set

manually.

Split Horizon Group

Member

- - l A split horizon group

member indicates the

logical port member in

the split horizon group.

l

The port members thatare added to different

split horizon groups

cannot communicate

with each other.

l The supports only the

division of the split

horizon group

members according to

the Ethernet physical

port.

l If a UNI or NNI logical

port of the 802.1ad

bridge is added to a

split horizon group

member, the physical

port that is mounted

with the logical port is

automatically added to

the split horizon group

member.

Maintenance Association Parameters


Maintenance

Domain Name

- - This parameter indicates the maintenance

domain of the created maintenance

association.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Maintenance

Association Name

- - l This parameter specifies the name of the

maintenance association, which is a

domain related to a service. Through

maintenance association division, the

connectivity check (CC) can be

performed on the network that transmits

a service instance.

l This parameter can contain a maximum

of eight bytes.

CC Test Transmit

Period

1s

10s

1m

10m

1s l This parameter specifies the interval for

transmitting packets in the CC test.

l The CC is performed to check the

availability of the service.

Parameters for the MEP


Maintenance

Domain Name


domain of the created MEP.

Maintenance

Association Name


association of the created MEP.

Node - - This parameter indicates the MEP node.

VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of

the current service.

MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.

l Each MEP needs to be configured with

an MEP ID, which is unique in the

maintenance association. The MEP ID is

required in the OAM operation.

Direction Ingress

Egress

Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction of

the MEP.

l "Ingress" indicates the direction in which

the packets are transmitted to the port,

and "Egress" indicates the direction in

which the packets are transmitted from

the port.

CC Status Active

Inactive

Active l This parameter specifies whether to

enable the CC function of the MEP.

l In the case of the tests based on the MP

IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.

OptiX RTN 910




A-143



A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet

Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.

2. Click New.

Parameters for the General Attributes


QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the QinQ link.

NOTEThe OptiX RTN 910

supports 1024 QinQ links,

whose IDs must be different

from each other.

Board - - This parameter specifies

the board where the QinQ

link is located.

Port - - This parameter specifies

the port where the QinQ

link is located.

S-Vlan ID 1 to 4094 - l This parameter


(at the network

operator side) for the

QinQ link.


according to the


A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.

A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.

A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)

management.

A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.

A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.

A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.

A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP

CIST.

A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.

A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly

Deleted

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.

A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route

management.

A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.

A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port

Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the

IGMP Snooping protocol.

A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member

Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.

A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics

This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP

Snooping protocol.

A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).

A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.

A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.

A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.

A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.

OptiX RTN 910




A-145



Navigation Path


Protection > ERPS Management.

2. Click New.

Parameters


ERPS ID 1 to 8 - l This parameter

specifies the ID of the

Ethernet ring

protection switching

(ERPS) instance.

l The IDs of ERPS

instances on an NEmust be different from

each other.

East Port - - This parameter specifies

the east port of the ERPS

instance.

West Port - - This parameter specifies

the west port of the ERPS

instance.

RPLOwner Ring Node

Flag

Yes

No

No l This parameter

specifies whether thenode on the ring is the

ring protection link

(RPL) owner.

l Only one node on the

ring can be set as the

RPL owner for each

Ethernet ring.

RPL Port - - l This parameter

specifies the RPL port.

l

There is only one RPL port and this RPL port

must be the east or west

port on the RPL owner

node.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter


of Control VLAN.

l Each node on the

Ethernet ring transmits

the R-APS packets on

the dedicated ring APS

(R-APS) channel to

ensure consistency

between the nodes

when the ERPS

switching is performed.

Control VLAN is used

for isolating the

dedicated R-APSchannel. Therefore, the

VLAN ID in Control

VLAN cannot be

duplicate with the

VLAN IDs that are

contained in the service

packets or inband DCN

packets.

l The Control VLAN

must be set to the same

value for all the NEs on

an ERPS ring.

Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicates

the MAC address of the

destination node. The

default destination MAC

address in the R-APS

packets is always 01-19-

A7-00-00-01.

A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)

management.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet

Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 910




A-147



Parameters


ERPS ID 1 to 8 - This parameter indicates

the ID of the ERPSinstance.

East Port - - This parameter indicates

the east port of the ERPS

instance.

West Port - - This parameter indicates

the west port of the ERPS

instance.

RPL Owner Ring Node

Flag

Yes

No


whether a node on the ring

is the ring protection link

(RPL) owner.

RPL Port - - This parameter indicates

the RPL port.

Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter


the VLAN ID of

Control VLAN.

l Each node on the

Ethernet ring transmits

the R-APS packets onthe dedicated ring APS

(R-APS) channel to

ensure consistency

between the nodes

when the ERPS

switching is performed.

Control VLAN is used

for isolating the

dedicated R-APS

channel. Therefore, the

VLAN ID in Control

VLAN cannot be

duplicate with the

VLAN IDs that are

contained in the service

packets or inband DCN

packets.

l The Control VLAN

must be set to the same

value for all the NEs on

an ERPS ring.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 - This parameter indicates


destination node. The

default destination MAC

address in the R-APS

packets is always 01-19-

A7-00-00-01.

Hold-Off Time(ms) 0 to 10000, in step of 100 - l This parameter


the hold-off time of the

ERPS hold-off timer.

l The hold-off timer is

used for negotiating the

protection switchingsequence when the

ERPS coexists with

other protection

schemes so that the

fault can be rectified in

the case of other

protection switching

(such as LAG

protection) before the

ERPS occurs. When a

node on the ring detects

one or more new faults,it starts up the hold-off

timer if the preset hold-

off time is set to a value

that is not 0. During the

hold-off time, the fault

is not reported to

trigger an ERPS. When

the hold-off timer times

out, the node checks the

link status regardless

whether the fault that

triggers the startup of the timer exists. If the

fault exists, the node

reports it to trigger an

ERPS. This fault can be

the same as or different

from the fault that

triggers the initial

startup of the hold-off

timer.

OptiX RTN 910




A-149




Guard Time(ms) 10 to 2000, in step of 10 - l This parameter


the guard time of the

ERPS guard timer.

l The nodes on the ring

continuously forward

the R-APS packets to

the Ethernet ring. As a

result, the outdated R-

APS packets may exist

on the ring network.

After a node on the ring

receives the outdated

R-APS packets, an

incorrect ERPS mayoccur. The ERPS guard

timer is an R-APS timer

used for preventing a

node on the ring from

receiving outdated R-

APS packets. When a

faulty node on the ring

detects that the

switching condition is

cleared, the node starts

up the guard timer and

starts to forward the R-APS (NR) packets.

During this period, the

R-APS packets

received by the node

are discarded. The

received R-APS

packets are forwarded

only after the time of

the guard timer expires.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




WTR Time(min) 5 to 12, in step of 1 - l This parameter


the WTR time of the

WRT timer in the case

of ERPS protection.

l The WTR time refers to

the duration from the

time when the working

channel is restored to

the time when the

switching is released.

When the working

channel is restored, the

WTR timer of the RPL

owner starts up. Inaddition, a signal that

indicates the operation

of the WTR timer is

continuously output in

the timing process.

When the WTR timer

times out and no

switching request of a

higher priority is

received, the signal

indicating the

operation of the WTR timer is not transmitted.

In addition, the WTR

release signal is

continuously output.

l The WTR timer is used

to prevent frequent

switching caused by the

unstable working

channel.

Packet Transmit

Interval(s)

1 to 10 - This parameter displays or

specifies the interval for

sending R-APS packets

periodically.

Entity Level 0 to 7 - This parameter indicates

or specifies the level of the

maintenance entity.

Last Switching Request - - This parameter indicates

the last switching request.

OptiX RTN 910




A-151




RB Status - - This parameter indicates

the RB status of the

packets received by the

working node.

l noRB: The RPL is not

blocked.

l RB (RPL Blocked):

The RPL is blocked.

DNF Status - - This parameter indicates

the DNF status of the

packets received by the

working node.

l noDNF: The R-APS

packets do not contain

the DNF flag. In this

case, the packets are

forwarded by the node

that detects the fault on

a non-RPL link, and the

node that receives the

packets is requested to

clear the forwarding

address table.

l DNF: The R-APS

packets contain theDNF flags. In this case,

the packets are

forwarded by the node

that detects the fault on

an RPL link, and the

node that receives the

packets is informed not

to clear the forwarding

address table.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Status of State Machine - - This parameter indicates

the status of the state

machine at the working

node.

l Idle: The Ethernet ring

is in normal state. For

example, no node on

the Ethernet ring

detects any faults or

receive the R_APS

(NR, RB) packets.

l Protection: The

Ethernet ring is in

protected state. For

example, a fault on the

node triggers the

ERPS, or a node on the

ring is in the WTR

period after the fault is

rectified.

Node Carried with

Current Packet


the MAC address carried

in the R-APS packets

received by the current

node. The MAC address

refers to the MAC addressof the source node that

initiates the switching

request.

A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port GroupCreation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.

Navigation Path


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.

3. Click Create. The Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.

OptiX RTN 910




A-153





Protocol Type MSTP

STP

MSTP This parameter specifies

the protocol type.

l MSTP: stands for

Multiple Spanning

Tree Protocol. The

OptiX RTN 910

supports the CIST

MSTP only.

l STP: stands for

Spanning Tree

Protocol.

Enable Protocol EnabledDisabled

Disabled l

This parameter specifies whether to

enable the protocol of

the port group or a

member port in the port

group.

l If the STP or MSTP is

enabled, the spanning

tree topology is

automatically re-

configured. As a result,

the services are

interrupted.

Parameters for Application Ports



the board where the

member of port group is

located.

Available Port List - - This parameter indicates

the available port list in

which a port can be added

to the port group.

Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates

the selected ports that can

be added to the port group.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)







Port Group ID - - l This parameter

indicates the ID of the port group.


set to only the port

group ID that is

automatically

allocated.

MST Domain Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this

parameter.

Redaction Level - - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support this

parameter.

Mapping List - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this

parameter.

Bridge Parameters


Port Group ID - - l This parameter


port group.


set to only the port

Group ID that is

automatically

allocated.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Network Diameter 2 to 7 7 l This parameter

specifies the MSTP

network diameter.

l Network Diameter is

related to the link

whose number of

switches is the most

and is indicated by the

number of switches that

are connected to the

link. When you set

Network Diameter for

the switches, the MSTP

automatically sets Max

Age(s), Hello Time(s),and Forward Delay(s)

to the more appropriate

values for the switches.

l If the value of Network

Diameter is greater,

the network is in a

larger scale.

Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameter

specifies the interval

for transmitting the

CBPDU packetsthrough the bridge.

l The greater the value of

this parameter, the less

the network resources

that are occupied by the

spanning tree. The

topology stability,

however, decreases.

OptiX RTN 910




A-157




Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameter

specifies the maximum

age of the CBPDU

packet that is recorded

by the port.

l The greater the value,

the longer the

transmission distance

of the CBPDU, which

indicates that the

network diameter is

greater. When the value

of this parameter is

greater, it is less

possible that the bridgedetects the link fault in

a timely manner and

thus the network

adaptation ability is

reduced.

Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameter

specifies the holdoff

time of a port in the

listening state and in

the learning state.

l The greater the value,the longer the delay of

the network state

change. Hence, the

topology changes are

slower and the recovery

in the case of faults is

slower.

Port ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description


the port in the port group.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Enable Edge Attribute Disabled

Enabled

Disabled l This parameter

specifies the

management edge

attributes of the port.

l This parameter

specifies whether to set

the port as an edge port.

The edge port refers to

the bridge port that is

connected to the LAN.

In normal cases, this

port does not receive or

transmit BPDU

messages.


set to Enabled only

when the port is

directly connected to

the data

communications

terminal equipment,

such as a computer. In

other cases, it is


use the default value.

Actual Edge Attribute - - This parameter indicatesthe actual management

edge attributes of the port.

OptiX RTN 910




A-159




Point-to-Point Attribute false

true

auto

auto l This parameter

specifies the point-to-

point attribute of the

port.

l false: forced non-

point-to-point link

attribute

l true: forced point-to-

point link attribute

l auto: automatically

detected point-to-point

link attribute


to auto, the bridgedetermines Actual

Point-to-Point

Attribute of the port

according to the actual

working mode. If the

actual working mode is

full-duplex, the actual

point-to-point attribute

is true. If the actual

working mode is half-

duplex, Actual Point-

to-Point Attribute isfalse.

l Only the designated

port whose Actual

Point-to-Point

Attribute is "True" can

transmit the rapid state

migration request and

response.


you use the default

value.

Actual Point-to-Point

Attribute


the actual point-to-point

attribute of the port.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Max Transmit Packet

Count



number of packets to be

transmitted.

l The maximum number

of packets to be

transmitted by the port

refers to the maximum

number of MSTP

packets that the port

can transmit within 1s.




A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CISTParameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.

Navigation Path



2. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.



Port Group - - This parameter specifies

the port group.

MSTI ID 0 0 This parameter indicates

the MSTI ID. The value 0

indicates common and

internal spanning tree

(CIST). TheOptiX RTN

910 supports only the

MSTP that uses CIST.

OptiX RTN 910




A-161




Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant 16

bits of the bridge ID

indicates the priority of

the bridge.

l When the value is

smaller, the priority is

higher. As a result, the

bridge is more possible

to be selected as the

root bridge.

l If the priorities of all

the bridges in the STP

network use the same

value, the bridge whose

MAC address is the

smallest is selected as

the root bridge.

Port Parameters




Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant

eight bits of the port ID

indicate the port

priority.

l When the value is


higher.

Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter

indicates the status of

the network that the

port is connected to.

l In the case of the

bridges on both ends of

the path, set this

parameter to the same

value.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP

CIST.

Navigation Path



2. Click the CIST Running Information tab.



Port Group ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the port group.

Protocol Running Mode MSTP

STP


indicates the running

mode of the protocol.

l MSTP: stands for

Multiple Spanning

Tree Protocol. The

OptiX RTN 910

supports only the

CIST-based MSTP.l STP: stands for

Spanning Tree

Protocol.

OptiX RTN 910




A-163




Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l This parameter


the bridge.

l The most significant 16



the bridge.

l When the value is



bridge is more possible

to be selected as the

root bridge.

l

If the priorities of allthe bridges in the STP



MAC address is the


the root bridge.

Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates


bridge.

Root Bridge MAC

Address


the MAC address of theroot bridge.

External Path Cost

ERPC

- - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this

parameter.

Domain Root Bridge

Priority


not support this

parameter.

Domain Root Bridge

MAC Address


not support this

parameter.

Internal Path Cost IRPC - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this

parameter.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Root Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l This parameter


the root port.

l The most significant

eight bits of the ID of

the root port indicate

the priority of the root

port.

l When the value is


higher.

Root Port - - This parameter indicates

the root port.

Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameter

indicates the interval

for transmitting

CBPDU packets

through the bridge.





spanning tree. The

topology stability,

however, decreases.



age of the CBPDU


by the port.


the longer the


of the CBPDU, which

indicates that the

network diameter is



greater, it is less

possible that the bridge

detects the link fault in

a timely manner and

thus the network


reduced.

OptiX RTN 910




A-165





specifies the holdoff



the learning state.


the longer the delay of

the network state

change. Hence, the




slower.

MST Domain Max HopCount

- - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support this

parameter.

Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates

the identifier of the

topology change.

Last Topology Change

Time(s)


the duration of the last

topology change.

Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates

the count of the topologychanges.

Port Parameters




Enable Protocol EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter indicateswhether the protocol of

the port group or a

member of the port group

is enabled.

Port Role - - This parameter indicates

the role of a port.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Port Status Discarding

Learning

Forwarding

Discarding This parameter indicates

the state of a port.

l Discarding: receivesonly BPDU packets

l Learning: only receives

or transmits BPDU

packets

l Forwarding: forwards

user traffic, and

transmits/receives

BPDU packets

Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant


indicate the port

priority.

l When the value is


higher.

Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter

indicates the status of

the network that the

port is connected to.

l In the case of the

bridges on both ends of the path, set this

parameter to the same

value.

Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant 16



the bridge.

l When the value is



bridge is more possibleto be selected as the

root bridge.

l If the priorities of all

the bridges in the STP



MAC address is the


the root bridge.

OptiX RTN 910




A-167




Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates


bridge.

Designated Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant


indicate the port

priority.

l When the value is


higher.

Design Port - - This parameter indicates

the designated port.

Edge Port Attribute Disabled

Enabled

Enabled l This parameter specifies the

management edge

attributes of the port.

l This parameter

specifies whether to set

the port as an edge port.

The edge port refers to

the bridge port that is

connected to the LAN.

In normal cases, this

port does not receive or transmit BPDU

messages.


set to Enabled only

when the port is

directly connected to

the data

communications

terminal equipment,

such as a computer. In

other cases, it is

recommended that youuse the default value.

Actual Edge Port

Attribute


the actual management

edge attributes of the port.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Point to Point false

true

auto

auto l This parameter

specifies the point-to-

point attribute of the

port.

l false: forced non-

point-to-point link

attribute

l true: forced point-to-

point link attribute

l auto: automatically

detected point-to-point

link attribute


to auto, the bridgedetermines Actual

Point to Point

Attribute of the port


working mode. If the

actual working mode is

full-duplex, the actual

point-to-point attribute

is true. If the actual

working mode is half-

duplex, Actual Point

to Point Attribute isfalse.

l Only the designated

port whose Actual

Point-to-Point

Attribute is "True" can

transmit the rapid state

migration request and

response.


you use the default

value.

Actual Point to Point - - This parameter indicates

the actual point-to-point

attribute of the port.

OptiX RTN 910




A-169




Max Count of

Transmitting Message


indicates the maximum

number of packets to be

transmitted.

l The maximum number

of packets to be

transmitted by the port

refers to the maximum

number of MSTP

packets that the port

can transmit within 1s.

Protocol Running Mode STP

MSTP

- l This parameter

indicates the running

mode of the protocol.l MSTP: stands for

Multiple Spanning

Tree Protocol. The

OptiX RTN 910

supports only the

CIST-based MSTP.

l STP: stands for

Spanning Tree

Protocol.

Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameter

indicates the intervalfor transmitting the

CBPDU packets

through the bridge.





spanning tree. The

topology stability,

however, decreases.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






age of the CBPDU


by the port.


the longer the


of the CBPDU, which

indicates that the

network diameter is



greater, it is less

possible that the bridgedetects the link fault in

a timely manner and

thus the network


reduced.


specifies the holding



the learning state.

l The greater the value,the longer the delay of

the network state

change. Hence, the




slower.

Remain Hop - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this

parameter.

A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >EthernetProtocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 910




A-171



2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.


Parameter Value Range Default Value DescriptionService ID - - This parameter indicates

the service ID.

Enabled Protocol Enabled

Disabled



enable the IGMP

Snooping protocol.

l If the bridge accesses a

LAN where the IGMP

multicast server exists,

you can enable the

IGMP Snooping

protocol according to

the requirement.

Router Port Aging Time

(min)

1 to 120 8 l If an entry is not

updated in a certain

period (that is, no

IGMP query packet is

received), this entry is

automatically deleted.

This mechanism is

called aging, and this

period is called aging

time.


to a very large value,

the bridge stores

excessive multicast

entries that are

outdated.

Consequently, the

resources of the

multicast table are

exhausted.l If this parameter is set

to a very small value,

the bridge may delete

the multicast entry that

is required.

Consequently, the

forwarding efficiency

decreases.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Maximum Times of No

Response from Multicast

Members



number of multicast

group members who do

not respond.

l If the IEEE 802.1q

bridge transmits an

IGMP group query

packet to the multicast

member ports, the

IEEE 802.1q bridge

starts the timer for the

query of the maximum

number of responses. If

no IGMP report packets are received

within the query time,

the IEEE 802.1q bridge

adds one to the number

of no responses at the

port. When the number

of no responses

exceeds the preset

value of Maximum

Times of No Response

from Multicast

Members, the IEEE802.1q bridge deletes

the additional multicast

members from the

multicast group.

Maximum Number of

Multicast Groups



number of allowable

multicast groups.

l The multicast group

records the mapping

relations between the

ports on the router,

MAC multicast

addresses, and member

ports in the multicast

group.

OptiX RTN 910




A-173




Maximum Number of

Multicast Group

Members



number of allowable

multicast group

members.

l A multicast group

member refers to the

host that is added to a

multicast group.

Actual Multicast Count - - This parameter indicates

the number of actually

used multicast groups.

Actual Multicast

Members Count


the number of actually

used multicast group

members.

A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.

Navigation Path


Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.

3. Click Add.

Parameters for Fast Leave Ports


Service ID - - This parameter indicates

the service ID.

VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter

specifies the VLAN

where the port to be

quickly deleted is

located.





OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Port Type V-UNI

V-NNI

V-UNI l This parameter

specifies the type of the

port to be quickly

deleted.





the port to be quickly

deleted.

A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route

management.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Router Port Management tab.

Parameters for Router Port Management


Service ID - - This parameter specifies

the ID of the created E-

LAN service.

VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter indicates

the VLAN ID of the router

port.

Port Type - - This parameter indicates

the type of the router port.


the router port.

Port Status - - This parameter indicates

the status of the router

port.

Port Creating Time - - This parameter indicates

the time when the router

port is created.

OptiX RTN 910




A-175




Port Remainder Aging

Time(min)


the remaining aging time

of the router port.

A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >EthernetProtocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Router Port Management tab.

3. Click New.

Parameters for Router Port Creation




LAN service.


the VLAN ID of the router

port.

Available Port - - This parameter indicates

the available ports.

Selected Port - - This parameter indicates

the specified router port.

A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the

IGMP Snooping protocol.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters for Multicast Groups Information



the ID of the created E-LAN service.


the VLAN ID of the

multicast group.

Multicast MAC Address - - This parameter indicates

the multicast MAC

address.

Multicast Groups Type - - This parameter indicates

the type of the multicast

group.

Multicast Group

Creating Time


the time when the

multicast group is set up.

Parameters for Multicast Group Members Information


Service ID - - This parameter specifiesthe ID of the created E-

LAN service.


the VLAN ID of the

multicast group member.


the type of the multicast

group member.


the multicast group

member port.

Port Remainder Aging

Times


the remaining non-

response times of the

multicast group member

port.

OptiX RTN 910




A-177



A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.

3. Click New.

Parameters for Router Port Creation




LAN service.

VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID of the

multicast group.

Multicast MAC Address - - This parameter specifies

the multicast MAC

address.

Available Port - - This parameter indicatesthe available interfaces.


the preset port of the

multicast group members.

A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics

This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP

Snooping protocol.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Packet Statistics tab.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters for Routing Member Interface Management


Service ID - - This parameter indicates

the service ID.

VLAN ID - - This parameter indicates

the VLAN ID of the

service.


the port type.


the port.

Packet Statistics Status Clear

Start

Stop

Clear This parameter indicates

or specifies the status of collecting the packet

statistics.

IGMPv1 Query Packet

Count


the number of received

IGMPv1 query packets.

IGMPv2 Query Packet

Count




IGMPv3 Query Packet

Count




IGMP Leaving Packet

Count

- - This parameter displays

the number of leaving

packets that are received.

IGMPv1 Member

Report Packet Count



packets that are reported

by the IGMPv1 members.

IGMPv2 MemberReport Packet Count - - This parameter indicatesthe number of received



IGMPv3 Member

Report Packet Count





Unrecognized or

Unprocessed Packet

Count


the number of packets that

cannot be recognized or

processed.

OptiX RTN 910




A-179




Discarded Incorrect

Packet Count


the number of discarded

error packets.

A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link AggregationManagement_LAG Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Interface

Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.

3. Click New.



LAG No. 1 to 16 1 l This parameter

specifies the LAG

number to be set

manually.


only when

Automatically Assign

is not selected.

Automatically Assign Selected

Deselected

Selected l This parameter

indicates whether LAG

No. is allocated

automatically.

l When Automatically

Assign is selected,LAG No. cannot be set.

LAG Name - - This parameter specifies

the LAG name.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




LAG Type Static

Manual

Static l Static: You can create a

LAG. When you add or

delete a member port to

or from the LAG, the

Link Aggregation

Control Protocol

(LACP) protocol is

required. In a LAG, a

port can be in the

Selected or Standby

state. The aggregation

information is

exchanged among

different equipment

through the LACP protocol to ensure that

the aggregation

information is the same

among all the nodes.

l Manual: You can

manually create a LAG.

When you add or delete

a member port, the

LACP protocol is not

required. The port can

be in the up or down

state. According to the physical up or down

state, the port

determines whether to

perform an

aggregation.

OptiX RTN 910




A-181




Revertive Mode Revertive

Non-Revertive

Non-Revertive l This parameter can be

set only when Load

Sharing is set to Non-

Sharing.

l When a LAG is set to

Revertive, the services

are switched back to the

former working

channel after this


normal.

l When a LAG is set to

Non-Revertive, the

status of the LAG does

not change after the

former working


normal. That is, the

services are still

transmitted on the

protection channel.

Load Sharing Sharing

Non-Sharing

Non-Sharing l Sharing: Each member

link of a LAG

processes traffic at the

same time and shares

the traffic load. Thesharing mode can

increase a bandwidth

utilization for the link.

When the LAG

members change, or

certain links fail, the

system automatically

re-allocates the traffic.

l Non-Sharing: Only one

member link of a LAG

carries traffic, and theother link is in the

standby state. In this

case, a hot backup

mechanism is

provided. When the

active link of a LAG is

faulty, the system

activates the standby

link, thus preventing

link failure.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Load Sharing Hash

Algorithm

Source MAC

Destination MAC

Source and DestinationMAC

Source IP

Destination IP

Source and Destination IP

Source MAC l This parameter is valid

only when Load

Sharing of a LAG is set

to Sharing.

l The load sharing

computation methods

include: MAC address

specific allocation

(based on the source

MAC address,

destination MAC

address, and XOR

between source MAC

address and source

MAC address), IPaddress specific

allocation (based on the

source IP address,

destination IP address,

and XOR between

source IP address and

source IP address).

OptiX RTN 910




A-183




System Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter


a LAG. The smaller the

value of System

Priority, the higher the

priority.

l When a local LAG

negotiates with an

opposite LAG through

LACP packets, both

LAGs can obtain the

system priorities of

each other. Then, the

LAG of the higher

system priority isconsidered as the

comparison result of

both LAGs so that the

aggregation

information is

consistent at both

LAGs. If the priorities

of both LAGs are the

same, the system MAC

addresses are

compared. Then, the

comparison result based on the LAG with

smaller system MAC

address is considered as

the result of both LAGs

and is used to ensure

that the aggregation

information is

consistent at both

LAGs.

Port Settings Parameters


Main Board - - l This parameter

specifies the main

board in a LAG.


according to the



OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Main Port - - l This parameter

specifies the main port

in a LAG.

l After a LAG is created,

you can add Ethernet

services to the main

port only. Services

cannot be added to a

slave port. When Load

Sharing is set to Non-

Sharing, the link

connected to the main

port is used to transmit

the services, and the

link connected to theslave port is used for

protection.

Board (Available Slave

Ports)


specifies the slave

board in a LAG.


according to the


Port (Available Slave

Ports)


specifies the salve portin a LAG.

l The slave ports in a

LAG are fixed. Unless

they are manually

modified, the system

does not automatically

add them to or delete

them from the LAG.

Selected Slave Ports - - This parameter indicates

the selected slave ports.

A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_PortPriority

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >InterfaceManagement > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 910




A-185



2. Click the Port Priority tab.


Parameter Value Range Default Value DescriptionPort - - This parameter indicates

the port whose priority can

be set.

Port Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter

indicates the priorities

of the ports in a LAG as

defined in the LACP

protocol. The smaller

the value, the higher the

priority.

l When ports are added

into a LAG, the port of

the highest priority is

preferred for service

transmission.

A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT


2. Click New.

Parameters for Convergence Points


Board - - This parameter specifies the board at the

convergence point.

Port - - This parameter specifies the port on the

board of the convergence point.

NOTEOne port can be in an LPT only.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters for Access Points


Board - - This parameter specifies the board at the

access point.

Port - - This parameter specifies the port on the

board of the access point.

NOTEThe access point supports selection of multiple

ports on different boards.

A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Port

Mirroring from the Function Tree.

2. Click New. The Port Mirror Management dialog box is displayed.



Mirror Name - - l This parameter specifies the name of the

mirroring task.

l After the mirroring function of the port is

enabled, you can monitor all the mirrored

ports by analyzing the packets at the

mirroring port only. As a result, you can

easily manage the ports.

Direction Ingress

Egress

Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction in

which the service to be monitored.

l Ingress indicates that the Listened Portcopies the received packets to the Mirror

Listener Port and sends the packets out

of the Mirror Listener Port.

l Egress indicates that the Listened Port

copies the transmitted packets to the

Mirror Listener Port and sends the

packets out of the Mirror Listener

Port.

Mirror Listener

Port

- - l This parameter specifies the mirroring

listener port and the listened port.

OptiX RTN 910




A-187




Listened Port - - l Listened Port indicates the source port

of the mirrored packets.

l

Mirror Listener Port indicates the portfrom which the packets copied from the

Listened Port are sent out.

l Mirror Listener Port: The port where

services are available cannot be selected.

Otherwise, the creation fails.

A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration andmaintenance (OAM).

A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain

Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.

A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association

Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.

A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end

point (MEP).

A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.

A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association

intermediate point (MIP).

A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.

A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.

A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter

This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.

A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring

This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the

Ethernet port.

A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_Maintenance Domain Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Navigation Path


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.



Maintenance

Domain Name


maintenance domain.

l The maintenance domain refers to the

network for the Ethernet OAM.

l This parameter can contain a maximumof eight bytes.

Maintenance

Domain Level

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

4 l This parameter specifies the level of the

maintenance domain.

l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level,

the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level,

and the values 5-7 indicates the user level.

l When the value is set to 0, the

maintenance domain is at the lowest

level. The values 1-7 indicate that the

level increases in a sequential order.l The OAM packets whose level is higher

than the preset value are transparently

transmitted by the MEPs. The OAM

packets whose level is lower than the

preset value are directly discarded by the

MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is

the same as the preset value are responded

to or terminated by the MEPs according

to the message type.

A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_Maintenance Association Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.

OptiX RTN 910




A-189



3. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.

Choose New > New Maintenance Association.



Maintenance

Domain Name


domain of the created maintenance

association.

Maintenance

Association Name


maintenance association, which is a

domain related to a service. Through

maintenance association division, the

connectivity check (CC) can be

performed on the network that transmits

a service instance.

l This parameter can contain a maximum

of eight bytes.

Relevant Service - - This parameter specifies the service

instance that is related to the maintenance

association.

CC Test Transmit

Period

1s

10s

1 min

10 min

1s l This parameter specifies the interval for

transmitting packets in the CC.

l The CC is performed to check the

availability of the service.

A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end

point (MEP).

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet



3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >

New MEP Point.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





Maintenance

Domain Name


domain of the created MEP.

Maintenance

Association Name



Board - - This parameter specifies the board where

the MEP is located.

Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the

MEP is located.

VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of

the current service.

MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.

l Each MEP needs to be configured with

an MEP ID, which is unique in the

maintenance association. The MEP ID is


Direction Ingress

Egress

Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction of

the MEP.

l Ingress indicates the direction in which

the packets are transmitted to the port,

and Egress indicates the direction in

which the packets are transmitted from

the port.

CC Status Active

Inactive

Active l This parameter specifies whether to

enable the CC function of the MEP.

l In the case of the tests based on the MP

IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.

A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_Remote MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.

Navigation Path




3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point

dialog box is displayed.

4. Click New.

OptiX RTN 910




A-191





Maintenance

Domain Name


domain of the MEP.

Maintenance

Association Name



Remote

Maintenance Point

ID(_e.g:1,3-6)

1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the

remote MEP.

l If other MEPs may initiate OAM

operations to an MEP in the same MA,

set the other MEPs to be the remote

MEPs.

A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_MIP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association

intermediate point (MIP).

Navigation Path



2. Click the MIP Point tab.

3. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.



Maintenance

Domain Name


domain of the MIP.

Board - - This parameter specifies the board where

the MIP is located.

Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the

MIP is located.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.

l Each MIP needs to be configured with an

MIP ID, which is unique in themaintenance domain. The MIP ID is


NOTETo create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a

port, ensure that only one MIP can be created

and the level of the MIP must be higher than

the level of the MEP.

A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_LB Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.

Navigation Path




3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.

4. Choose OAM > Start LB.



MP ID Selected

Deselected

Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the

LB test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.

Sink Maintenance

Point MAC

Address

Selected

Deselected

Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the

LB test is performed on the basis of MAC

addresses.

Maintenance

Domain Name

- - This parameter indicates the name of the

maintenance domain for the LB test.

Maintenance

Association Name


maintenance association for the LB test.

Source

Maintenance Point

ID

- - l This parameter specifies the source

maintenance point in the LB test.

l Only the MEP can be set to the source

maintenance point.

OptiX RTN 910




A-193




Destination

Maintenance Point

ID

- - l This parameter specifies the destination

maintenance point in the LB test.

l Only the MEP can be set to thedestination maintenance point.

l Destination Maintenance Point ID can

be set only when MP ID is selected.

Destination

Maintenance Point

MAC Address

- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC

address of the port where the destination

maintenance point is located in the LB

test.

l Only the MAC address of the MEP can

be set to the MAC address of the

destination maintenance point.

l Destination Maintenance Point MAC

Address can be set only when Sink

Maintenance Point MAC Address.

Transmitted

Packet Count

1 to 255 3 l This parameter specifies the number of

packets transmitted each time in the LB

test.

l When the value is greater, the required

duration is longer.

Transmitted

Packet Length

64 to 1400 64 l This parameter specifies the length of a

transmitted LBM packet.l If the packet length is different, the test

result may be different. In normal cases,

it is recommended that you use the

default value.

Transmitted

Packet Priority

0 to 7 7 l This parameter specifies the priority of

transmitting packets.

l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7

indicates the highest priority. In normal

cases, this parameter is set to the highest

priority.

Detection Result - - This parameter indicates the relevant

information and result of the LB test.

A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_LT Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Navigation Path




3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.

4. Choose OAM > Start LT.

Test Node Parameters


MP ID Selected

Deselected

Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.

Sink Maintenance

Point MACAddress

Selected

Deselected

Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

test is performed on the basis of MACaddresses.

Maintenance

Domain Name


maintenance domain for the LT test.

Maintenance

Association Name


maintenance association for the LT test.

Source

Maintenance Point

ID

- - l This parameter specifies the source

maintenance point in the LT test.

l Only the MEP can be set to the source

maintenance point.

Destination

Maintenance Point

ID

- - l This parameter specifies the destination


l Only the MEP can be set to the


l Destination Maintenance Point ID can

be set only when MP ID is selected.

Destination

Maintenance Point

MAC Address

- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC

address of the port where the destination

maintenance point is located in the LT

test.

l Only the MAC address of the MEP can

be set to the MAC address of the


l Destination Maintenance Point MAC

Address can be set only when Sink

Maintenance Point MAC Address.

OptiX RTN 910




A-195



Parameters for the Detection Result


Source

Maintenance PointID

- - This parameter indicates the source


Destination

Maintenance Point

ID/MAC

- - This parameter indicates the MAC address

of the port where the destination

maintenance point is located in the LT test.

Response

Maintenance Point

ID/MAC

- - This parameter indicates the MAC address

of the port where the responding

maintenance point is located in the LT test.

Hop Count 1 to 64 - l This parameter indicates the number of

hops from the source maintenance point

to the responding maintenance point or to

the destination maintenance point in the

LT test.

l The number of hops indicates the

adjacent relation between the responding

maintenance point to the source

maintenance point. The number of hops

increases by one when a responding point

occurs on the link from the source

maintenance point to the destination

maintenance point.

Test Result -

-

- This parameter indicates the result of the LT

test.

A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAMManagement_OAM Parameter

This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.

Navigation Path


OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.



Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

port.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Enable OAM

Protocol

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

whether to enable the OAM protocol.

l After the OAM protocol is enabled, thecurrent Ethernet port starts to use the

preset mode to create the OAM

connection with the opposite end.

OAM Working

Mode

Active

Passive

Active l This parameter indicates or specifies the

working mode of the OAM.

l The port whose OAM working mode is

set to Active can initiate the OAM

connection.

l The port whose OAM working mode is

set to Passive can only wait for the

opposite end to send the OAM

connection request.

l The OAM working mode of the

equipment at only one end can be

Passive.

Link Event

Notification

Enabled

Disabled


whether the local link events can be

notified to the opposite end.

l If the alarms caused by link events can be

reported, that is, if the number of

performance events (for example, error frame period, error frame, error frame

second, and error frame signal cycle) at

the local end exceeds the preset

threshold, these performance events are

notified to the port at the opposite end

through the link event notification

function.



OptiX RTN 910




A-197




Remote Side

Loopback

Response

Disabled

Enabled


whether the port responds to the remote

loopback.

l Remote loopback indicates that the local

OAM entity transmits packets to the

remote OAM entity for loopback. The

local OAM entity can locate the fault and

test the link performance through

loopback data analysis.

l If a port does not support remote

loopback response, this port does not

respond to the loopback request from the

remote port regardless of the OAM port

status.

Loopback Status Non-Loopback

Initiate Loopback at

Local

Respond Loopback

of Remote

- This parameter indicates the loopback status

at the local end.

NOTELoopback Status is valid only after you choose

OAM > Enable Remote Loopback .

OAM Discovery

Status

FAULT

ACTIVE_SEND_L

OCAL

PASSIVE_WAIT

SEND_LOCAL_R

EMOTE

SEND_LOCAL_R

EMOTE_OK

SEND_ANY

- This parameter indicates the OAM

discovery status at the local end.

Port Transmit

Status

FWD

DISCARD

- l This parameter indicates the status of

transmitting packets at the local end.

l When a port is in the FWD state, the port

forwards the non-OAM packets. When a

port is in the DISCARD state, the port

discards the non-OAM packets.

Port Receive Status FWD

DISCARD

LB

- l This parameter indicates the status of

receiving packets at the local end.

l In the FWD state, the port forwards the

non-OAM packets. In the LB state, the

port loopback the non-OAM packets. In

the DISCARD state, the port discards the

non-OAM packets.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAMManagement_OAM Error Frame Monitoring

This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the

Ethernet port.

Navigation Path


OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.




port.

Error Frame

Monitor Window

(ms)

1000 to 60000, in

step of 100

1000 This parameter specifies the duration of

monitoring error frames.

Error Frame

Monitor Threshold

(frame)

1 to 4294967295, in

step of 1

1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of

monitoring error frames.

l Within the specified value of Error

Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the

number of error frames on the link

exceeds the preset value of Error Frame

Monitor Threshold(frame), an alarm is

reported.

Error Frame

Period Window

(frame)

1488 to 892800000,

in step of 1

892800000 This parameter specifies the window of

monitoring the error frame period.

Error Frame

Period Threshold

(frame)

1 to 892800000, in

step of 1


monitoring the error frame period.


Frame Period Window(frame), if the

number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame

Period Threshold(frame), an alarm is

reported.

Error Frame

Second Window(s)

10 to 900, in step of

1

60 This parameter specifies the time window of

monitoring the error frame second.

OptiX RTN 910




A-199




Error Frame

Second Threshold

(s)

10 to 900, in step of

1


monitoring error frame seconds.

l If any error frame occurs in one second,this second is called an errored frame

second. Within the specified value of

Error Frame Second Window(s), if the

number of error frames on the link

exceeds the preset value of Error Frame

Second Threshold(s), an alar m is

reported.

Error Frame

Signal Periodic

Monitor Window

(Entries)

1 to 60, in step of 1 1 This parameter specifies the window of

monitoring the error frame signal period.

Error Frame

Signal Periodic

Monitor Threshold

(Entries)

1 to 7500000000, in

step of 1


monitoring the error frame signal period.


Frame Signal Periodic Monitor

Window(Entries), if the number of error

signals exceeds the preset value of Error

Frame Signal Periodic Monitor

Threshold(Entries) , an alarm is

reported.

A.11 QoS Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.

A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.

A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.

A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_ModificationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied

ports.

A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.

A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.

A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.

A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS

Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.



Mapping Relation ID 1 to 8 1 This parameter indicates

the ID of the mapping

relation between DiffServ

domains.

Mapping Relation Name - Default Map This parameter indicates

the name of the mapping

relation between DiffServ

domains.

NOTE

If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and

Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain.The default DiffServ domain cannot be modified or deleted.

Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation


CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter


the C-VLAN of the

ingress packets.

l

C-VLAN indicates theclient-side VLAN, and

the value 7 indicates the

highest priority.



the S-VLAN of the

ingress packets.

l S-VLAN indicates the

server-side VLAN, and


highest priority.

OptiX RTN 910




A-201




IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameter

indicates the DSCP

priority of the IP

addresses of the ingress

packets.

l The differentiated

services code point

(DSCP) refers to bits

0-5 of the differentiated

services (DS) field in

the packet and indicates

the service class and

discarding priority of

the packet.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




PHB BE

AF1

AF2

AF3

AF4

EF

CS6

CS7

- l This parameter

indicates the per-hop

behavior (PHB) service

class of the DiffServ

domain.

l The PHB service class

refers to the forwarding

behavior of the

DiffServ node on the

behavior aggregate

(BA) operation. The

forwarding behavior

can meet the specific

requirements.

l The PHB service

classes are BE, AF1,

AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,

CS6, and CS7. The

priorities (C_VLAN

priority, S_VLAN

priority, and DSCP

value) contained in the

packets of the DiffServ

domain and the eight

PDB service classes

meet the requirements

of the specified or

default mapping

relation.

NOTEThe AF1 is classified into

three sub service classes,

namely, AF11, AF12, and

AF13, only one of which is

valid. It is the same case

with the AF2, AF3, and

AF4.

OptiX RTN 910




A-203



Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation


PHB BE

AF1

AF2

AF3

AF4

EF

CS6

CS7

- l This parameter

indicates the PHBservice class of the

DiffServ domain.



behavior of the

DiffServ node on the

behavior aggregate

(BA) operation. The

forwarding behavior


requirements.l The PHB service


AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,

CS6, and CS7. The

priorities (C_VLAN

priority, S_VLAN

priority, and DSCP


packets of the DiffServ


PDB service classes

meet the requirementsof the specified or

default mapping

relation.







AF4.

CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter indicates the priority of

the C-VLAN of the

egress packets.

l C-VLAN indicates the

client-side VLAN, and


highest priority.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






the S-VLAN of the

egress packets.




highest priority.


indicates the DSCP

priority of the IP


packets.

l The DSCP refers to bits0-5 of the DS field in




the packet.




the port that uses the

DiffServ domain.

Packet Type CVLAN

SVLAN

IP-DSCP

CVLAN The packets trusted by the

OptiX RTN 910 are the

C_VLAN, S_VLAN and

IP DSCP packets that

contain the C_VLAN

priority, S_VLAN

priority, or DSCP value.

By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the

BE service class for best-

effort forwarding.

NOTEThe E-Line point-to-point

transparent transmission

service supports only the

mapping from DSCP

packets to the PHB service

class.

OptiX RTN 910




A-205



A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ DomainManagement_Create

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS


2. Click Create.



Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 2 This parameter specifies

the ID of the mapping

relation of a DS domain.

Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter specifies



Packet Type cvlan

svlan

ip-dscp

cvlan l This parameter


packet.

l The packets trusted by

the OptiX RTN 910 arethe C_VLAN,

S_VLAN and IP DSCP

packets that contain the

C_VLAN priority,

S_VLAN priority, or

DSCP value. By

default, the untrusted

packets are mapped to

the BE service class for

best-effort forwarding.




mapping from DSCP


class.

NOTE

If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, Mapping

Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. Thedefault DS domain cannot be modified and deleted.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation


CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter

specifies the C-VLAN priority of the ingress

packets.




highest priority.



priority of the ingress

packets.




highest priority.


specifies the DSCP

priority of the IP


packets.

l The differentiated

services code point(DSCP) refers to bits






the packet.

OptiX RTN 910




A-207




PHB BE

AF1

AF2

AF3

AF4

EF

CS6

CS7

- l This parameter

indicates the PHB

service class of the DS

domain.



behavior of the DS

node on the behavior

aggregate (BA)

operation. The

forwarding behavior


requirements.

l The PHB service


AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,

CS6, and CS7. The

priorities (C_VLAN

priority, S_VLAN

priority, and DSCP


packets of the DS


PDB service classes

meet the requirements

of the specified or

default mapping

relation.







AF4.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation


PHB BE

AF1

AF2

AF3

AF4

EF

CS6

CS7

- l This parameter

indicates the PHBservice class of the DS

domain.



behavior of the DS

node on the behavior

aggregate (BA)

operation. The

forwarding behavior


requirements.l The PHB service


AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,

CS6, and CS7. The

priorities (C_VLAN

priority, S_VLAN

priority, and DSCP


packets of the DS


PDB service classes

meet the requirementsof the specified or

default mapping

relation.







AF4.

CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter specifies the C-VLAN

priority of the egress

packets.




highest priority.

OptiX RTN 910




A-209






priority of the egress

packets.




highest priority.


specifies the DSCP

priority of the IP

addresses of the egress

packets.

l The differentiatedservices code point

(DSCP) refers to bits






the packet.




the board that uses the

mapping relations

between DS domains.

Available Port - - This parameter displays

the available port list from

which you can select the

port that uses the mappingrelations between DS

domains.

Selected Port - - This parameter displays

the selected port list. The

ports in the list use the

mapping relations

between DS domains.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain AppliedPort_Modification

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied

ports.

Navigation Path



2. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.

3. Click the Apply Port tab.

4. Click Modify.

Parameters for Configuring the Applied PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter indicates



OptiX RTN 910




A-211




Packet Type CVLAN

SVLAN

IP-DSCP

CVLAN l This parameter


packet.

l The packets trusted by

the OptiX RTN 910 are

the C-VLAN, S-VLAN

and IP-DSCP packets

that contain the C-

VLAN priority, S-

VLAN priority, or

DSCP value. By

default, the untrusted

packets are mapped to

the BE service class for

best-effort forwarding.

l When the OptiX RTN

910 receives services

and identifies service

types based on VLAN

priorities, the trusted

packets at a UNI ports

carry C-VLAN

priorities, and the

trusted packets at an

NNI port carry S-

VLAN priorities.

When the OptiX RTN

910 receives services

and identifies service

types based on DSCP

values, the trusted

packets at a port carry

IP-DSCP values.




mapping from DSCP


class.


the board where the port is

located.

Available Port - - This parameter indicates

the available port.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





the selected port.

The selected port isapplied to the DS domain.

NOTE

If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910,Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation

Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The port applied

to the default DS domain cannot be modified.

A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS

Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.

Parameters


Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameter

indicates the policy ID

of the port.

l The OptiX RTN 910

supports a maximum

number of 36 policies.

Policy Name - - This parameter indicates

or specifies the policy

name of the port.

OptiX RTN 910




A-213




CoS CS7

CS6

EF

AF4

AF3

AF2

AF1

BE

- l The BE, AF1, AF2,

AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,

and CS7 service classes

respectively map eight

queuing entities. The

OptiX RTN 910

provides different QoS

policies for the queues

at different service

classes.

l CS6-CS7: indicates the

highest service grade,

which is mainly

involved in signaling

transmission.

l EF: indicates fast

forwarding. This

service class is

applicable to the traffic

whose delay is small

and packet loss ratio is

low, for example, voice

and video services.

l AF1-AF4: indicates

assured forwarding.

This service class isapplicable to the traffic

that requires rate

guarantee but does not

require delay or jitter

limit.

l BE: indicates that the

traffic is forwarded in

best-effort manner

without special

processing.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Grooming Police After

Reloading

SP

WRR

CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP

AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:

WRR

l The strict priority (SP)

scheduling algorithm is

designed for the key

services. One

important

characteristic of the key

services is that higher

priorities are required

to minimize the

response delay in the

case of congestion

events.

l The weighted round

robin (WRR)

scheduling algorithmdivides each port into

multiple output sub-

queues. The polling

scheduling is

performed among the

output sub-queues to

ensure that each sub-

queue has a certain

period of service time.

l The OptiX RTN 910

supports the setting of

the SP+WRR

scheduling algorithm

of the CoS queue

according to the

requirement, and

provides one or more

queues that comply

with the SP algorithm.

Except for the default

value, however, the

value of the WRR

scheduling algorithmand the value of the SP


cannot be interleaved.

That is, except for the

default value,

Grooming Police

After Reloading can

be changed from SP to

WRR according to the

queue priorities in a

descending order

(CS7-BE).

OptiX RTN 910




A-215





according to the


Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameter

specifies the weight of

the policy in the WRR

queue. The weight

indicates the

percentage of the

bandwidth resources

obtained by the WRR

queue.


set only whenGrooming Police

After Reloading is set

to WRR .


according to the


Bandwidth Limit Disabled

Enabled



whether traffic shaping

is enabled for an egress

queue corresponding toa PHB service class.

l CIR (kbit/s), PIR

(kbit/s), CBS (byte),

and PBS (byte) can be

set only when

Bandwidth Limit is

set to Enabled.


according to the


CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

egress queue uses the

single token bucket two

color marker algorithm.

The value of the CIR must

be equal to the value of the

PIR. In actual traffic

shaping processing, only

the PIR is valid.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue

is empty, the packets

are processed as

follows: If the rate of a

packet is equal to or

lower than the PIR, it is

directly forwarded; if

the rate of a packet is

higher than the PIR, it

enters the buffer queue

and then is forwarded at

a rate equal to the PIR.

l When the buffer queue

is not empty, the

packets whose rate passes the restriction of

the PIR directly enter

the buffer queue and

then are forwarded at a

rate equal to the PIR.


according to the


CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that

you set the value of the

CBS equal to the valueof the PIR. In actual

traffic shaping

processing, only the

PBS is valid.


according to the


PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue

is empty, certain burst

packets can be

forwarded if the rate of

the packets is equal to

or lower than the PIR in

a certain period. The

maximum traffic of the

burst packets is

determined by the PBS.


according to the


OptiX RTN 910




A-217



A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS


2. Click the CoS Queue Configuration tab.

3. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.

Parameters


Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameter

specifies the policy IDof the port.

l The OptiX RTN 910

supports a maximum

number of 36 policies.

Automatically Assign Selected

Deselected

Deselected This parameter specifies

whether to automatically

allocate the policy ID of

the port policy. After this

parameter is selected, the

system automatically

allocates the policy ID,

and then the policy ID

cannot be set manually.

Policy Name - - This parameter specifies

the policy name of the

port.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




CoS CS7

CS6

EF

AF4

AF3

AF2

AF1

BE

- l The BE, AF1, AF2,

AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,

and CS7 service classes

respectively map eight

queuing entities. The

OptiX RTN 910

provides different QoS

policies for the queues

at different service

class.

l CS6-CS7: indicates the

highest service grade,

which is mainly

involved in signaling

transmission.

l EF: indicates fast

forwarding. This

service class is

applicable to the traffic

whose delay is small

and packet loss ratio is

low, for example, voice

and video services.

l AF1-AF4: indicates

assured forwarding.

This service class isapplicable to the traffic

that requires rate

guarantee but does not

require delay or jitter

limit.

l BE: indicates that the

traffic is forwarded in

best-effort manner

without special

processing.

OptiX RTN 910




A-219




Grooming Police After

Reloading

SP

WRR

CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP

AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:

WRR

l The strict priority (SP)

scheduling algorithm is

designed for the key

services. One

important

characteristic of the key

services is that higher

priorities are required

to minimize the

response delay in the

case of congestion

events.

l The weighted round

robin (WRR)

scheduling algorithmdivides each port into

multiple output sub-

queues. The polling

scheduling is

performed among the

output sub-queues to

ensure that each sub-

queue has a certain

period of service time.

l The OptiX RTN 910


the SP+WRR


of the CoS queue

according to the

requirement, and

provides one or more

queues that comply

with the SP algorithm.

Except for the default

value, however, the

value of the WRR

scheduling algorithmand the value of the SP


cannot be interleaved.

That is, except for the

default value,

Grooming Police

After Reloading can

be changed from SP to

WRR according to the

queue priorities in a

descending order

(CS7-BE).


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





according to the


Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameter

specifies the weight of

the policy in the WRR

queue. The weight

indicates the

percentage of the

bandwidth resources

obtained by the WRR

queue.


set only whenGrooming Police

After Reloading is set

to WRR .


according to the



Enabled



whether traffic shaping

is enabled for an egress

queue corresponding toa PHB service class.

l CIR (kbit/s), PIR



set only when

Bandwidth Limit is

set to Enabled.


according to the


CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

egress queue uses the

single token bucket two






the PIR is valid.

OptiX RTN 910




A-221




PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue


are processed as









a rate equal to the PIR.


is not empty, the

packets whose rate passes the restriction of






according to the


CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that

you set the value of the

CBS equal to the valueof the PIR. In actual

traffic shaping

processing, only the

PBS is valid.


according to the


PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue


packets can be






burst packets is



according to the



OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic ClassificationConfiguration

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.

3. Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.



Traffic Classification ID 1 to 1024 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the traffic

classification.

ACL Action Permit

Deny

Permit l The access control list

(ACL) determines

whether to forward or

discard the packets that

enter the port according

to the specified

matching rules.

l When this parameter isset to Permit, the ACL

on the ingress side

filters the packets that

enter the port. Only the

packets that match the

specified rules can be

received by the port.

l When this parameter is

set to Deny, ACL

processing is not

performed for the

packets over the ingress

port.

OptiX RTN 910




A-223



Ingress Parameters


Logical Relation

Between Matched Rules

And And l This parameter

specifies the logicalrelationship between

the traffic classification

matching rules.

l The OptiX RTN 910


the logical AND

between multiple

matching rules.

Match Type DSCP Value

CVlan IDCVlan priority

SVlan ID

SVlan priority

- l After you click Add or

Delete, complex traffic

classification can be

performed on the traffic

that enters the ingress

port according to the

preset matching rules.

l In the case a specific

service, complex traffic

classification can be

divided into basic

traffic types according

to the DSCP value,

C_VLAN ID,C_VLAN priority,

S_VLAN ID, or

S_VLAN priority.

Traffic type is based on

the associated Ethernet

packets. Therefore, this

parameter is set

according to the packet

type and the planning

information.

Match Value DSCP Value: 0 to 63CVlan ID: 1 to 4094

CVlan priority: 0 to 7

SVlan ID: 1 to 4094

SVlan priority: 0 to 7

- l

If the matching value of the packets is the same

as the preset Match

Value, the packets

match the rules of

complex traffic

classification.


according to the



OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




CoS -

CS7

CS6

EF

AF4

AF3

AF2

AF1

BE

- l This parameter

specifies the PHB

service class queue

mapped by the traffic

classification packets.


to empty (-), the traffic

classification packets

map the PHB service

class queue according

the mapping relation

specified in the topic

about Diffserv domain

management.


according to the



Enabled

Enabled l This parameter


whether the CAR

operation is performed

for the flow in the

ingress direction.

l CIR (kbit/s), PIR

(kbit/s), CBS (byte),and PBS (byte) can be

set only when

Bandwidth Limit is

set to Enabled.


according to the


OptiX RTN 910




A-225




CIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the

packets is not more

than the CIR, the

packets are marked

blue and pass the CAR

policing. These packets

are first forwarded in

the case of network

congestion.

l When the rate of the

packets is more than the

CIR but not more than

the PIR, the packets

whose rate is more than

the CIR can pass therestriction of the CAR

and are marked yellow.

The processing method

of the packets marked

yellow can be set to

"Pass" or "Remark".

"Remark" indicates


mapped into another

specified queue of a

higher priority (this is

equal to changing the priority of the packets)

and then forwarded to

the next port. If a

network congestion

event occurs again, the

packets marked yellow

can be processed

according to the new

priority.




OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the


PIR, the packets that

exceed the rate

restriction are marked

red and directly

discarded.

l When the rate of the



the PIR, the packets

whose rate is more than

the CIR can pass the

restriction of the CAR

and are marked yellow.The processing method

of the packets marked

yellow can be set to

"Pass" or "Remark".

"Remark" indicates


mapped into another



equal to changing the

priority of the packets)

and then forwarded tothe next port. If a

network congestion

event occurs again, the

packets marked yellow

can be processed

according to the new

priority.


according to the


OptiX RTN 910




A-227




CBS(byte) - - l During a certain period,

if the rate of the packets

whose processing

method is marked

"Pass" is not more than

the CIR, certain burst

packets are allowed and

can be first forwarded

in the case of network

congestion. The


burst packets is

determined by the

CBS.

l This parameter is setaccording to the


PBS(byte) - - l During a certain period,

if the rate of the packets

whose processing

method is marked

"Pass" is more than the


the PIR, certain burst

packets are allowed and

marked yellow. Themaximum traffic of the

burst packets is



according to the


Coloration Mode Color Blindness Color Blindness l This parameter

specifies the CAR

operation performed by

the equipment on the

packets. The packetsare dyed according to

the result of the CAR

operation. The dying

rule is determined by

the comparison

between the rate of the

packets and the preset

CAR value.

l The OptiX RTN 910

supports Color

Blindness only.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Packet Color Red

Yellow

Green

- Packets can be dyed in

three colors: red, yellow,

and green. The packets in

red are first discarded.

Handling Mode Discard

Pass

Remark

- l This parameter

specifies the method of

handling the packets.

l Discard: The packets

are discarded.

l Pass: The packets are

forwarded.

l Remark: The packets

are remarked.

"Remark" indicates


mapped into another



equal to changing the

priority of the packets)

and then forwarded to

the next port.

Relabeled CoS CS7

CS6EF

AF4

AF3

AF2

AF1

BE

- If the handling method is

set to "Remark", you can

reset the CoS of the packets.

OptiX RTN 910




A-229



Egress Parameters



Enable

Enable l This parameter

indicates or specifieswhether the traffic

shaping is performed in

the egress function.

l CIR (kbit/s), PIR



set only when

Bandwidth Limit is

set to Enabled.



CIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no

packets exist in the

egress queue: When the

rate of the packets is not

more than the CIR,

these packets directly

enter the egress queue.

l In the case that certain


egress queue: The packets whose rate

passes the restriction of


the egress queue, which

forwards the packets to

the next port at the CIR.


according to the



OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




PIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no


egress queue: If the rate

of the packets is more

than the CIR but is not

more than the PIR, the

packets whose rate is

more than the CIR enter




If the rate of the packets

is more than the PIR,

the packets are directly

discarded.l In the case that certain


egress queue: The

packets whose rate







according to the


CBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the packets

is not more than the

CIR during a certain

period, the burst

packets are directly

transmitted. The


burst packets is

determined by the

CBS.


according to the


OptiX RTN 910




A-231




PBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the packets

is more than the CIR

but is not more than the

PIR during a certain

period, the burst

packets enter the egress

queue. The maximum

traffic of the burst

packets is determined

by the PBS.


according to the


A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.

Navigation Path


Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click New.

Parameters for Port Shaping Management


Slot No. - - This parameter specifies

the slot ID.


the port.

CIR (kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

egress queue uses thesingle token bucket two






the PIR is valid.

If the traffic shaping

function is enabled, OptiX

RTN 910 processes the

packets in the buffer

queue through the

CBS (byte) - -

PIR (kbit/s) - -


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




PBS (byte) - - following methods when

no packets are available in

the queue.



are processed as









a rate equal to the PIR.l When the buffer queue


packets can be






burst packets is



is not empty, the

packets whose rate






A.12 RMON ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.

A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group

OptiX RTN 910




A-233



This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.

A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.

A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control GroupThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.

A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.

A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_StatisticsGroup

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.

Navigation Path

1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Statistics Group tab.

Parameters


Object - - This parameter specifies the object to be

monitored.

Sampling Period 5 to 150 5 This parameter specifies the duration of themonitoring period.

Display

Accumulated

Value

Selected

Deselected

Deselected l This parameter specifies the method of

displaying the performance events.

l If this parameter is not selected, the

displayed value is an increment

compared to the value that is collected in

last sampling period and stored in the

register.

l If this parameter is selected, the displayed

value is an absolute value that is currently

stored in the register.

Display Mode Graphics

List

List l This parameter specifies the method of


l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the

number of performance events to be

monitored at each time cannot be more

than 10, and the unit should be the same.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Legend Color

Description

- l This parameter indicates the description

of different colors.

l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to Graphics.

Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.


Display Mode is set to List.

A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.

Navigation Path



2. Click the History Group tab.

Parameters


Object - - The parameter indicates the object to be

monitored.

Ended - - This parameter specifies the start time and

end time of the monitoring period.

History Table

Type

30-Second

30-Minute

Custom Period 1

Custom Period 2

30-Second This parameter specifies the monitoring

period.

Display Mode Graphics

List

List l This parameter specifies the method of


l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the

number of performance events to be

monitored at each time cannot be more

than 10, and the unit should be the same.

Legend Color

Description

- l This parameter indicates the description

of different colors.


Display Mode is set to Graphics.

OptiX RTN 910




A-235




Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.

l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to List.

Statistical Item - - This parameter indicates the performance

items to be monitored.

Statistical Value - - This parameter indicates the statistical value

of the monitored performance items.

Time Flag - - This parameter indicates the time point of

each performance event.

A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_HistoryControl Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History

Control Group.

Parameters


30-Second Enabled

Disabled

Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies

whether to enable the 30-Second

monitoring function.

30-Minute Enabled

Disabled

Enabled This parameter indicates or specifies

whether to enable the 30-Minute


Custom Period 1 EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable Custom Period 1.

Custom Period 2 Enabled

Disabled


whether to enable Custom Period 2.

History Register

Count(1-50)

1 to 50 16

6(Custom Period 2)

This parameter indicates or specifies the

quantity of the history registers.

Period Length(300

to 43200 seconds, a

multiple of 30)

300 to 43200 900 l This parameter indicates or specifies the

monitoring period in Custom Period 1.

l The value must be an integer multiple of

30.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Period Length(300

to 86400 seconds, a

multiple of 30)

300 to 86400 86400 l This parameter indicates or specifies the

monitoring period in Custom Period 2.

l The value must be an integer multiple of 30.

A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.

Navigation Path

l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose


l Click the RMON Setting tab.

Object Parameters


Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be

collected.

30-Second Enabled

Disabled

- This parameter indicates or specifies

whether to enable the 30-Second


NOTEIn the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.

30-Minute Enabled

Disabled




l In RMON History Control Group of

the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,

Not Supported is displayed for this

parameter.


Disabled

- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoring

function based on Custom Period 1.


the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to

Disabled, Not Supported is displayed

for this parameter.

OptiX RTN 910




A-237





Disabled


whether to enable the monitoring

function based on Custom Period 2.


the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to

Disabled, Not Supported is displayed

for this parameter.

Event Parameters


Event - - This parameter indicates the performanceevent to be monitored.

30-Second Enabled

Disabled


whether to enable the monitoring function

based on 30-Second.

30-Minute Enabled

Disabled

- This parameter indicates or specifies




Disabled



based on Custom Period 1Custom Period1 Monitor.


Disabled



based on Custom Period 2Custom Period

2 Monitor.

Threshold Detect Report All

Do Not Detect

Report Only the

Upper Threshold

Report Only the

Lower Threshold

Report All l This parameter indicates or specifies the

threshold detection method.

l If the number of detected events reaches

the preset threshold, the events are

reported to the NMS. Otherwise, theevents are not reported to the NMS.

l If an event does not support this

parameter, Not Supported is displayed.

Upper Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

upper threshold. If the number of

performance events exceeds the preset

upper threshold, the corresponding

performance events are reported.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Lower Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

lower threshold. If the number of

performance events is less than the preset

lower threshold, the corresponding

performance events are reported.

Threshold Unit - - This parameter indicates the unit of each

threshold of the performance events.

A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.


This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.


This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.


This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.

A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring InterfaceThis topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.


This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >

Orderwire from the Function Tree.

2. Click the General tab.

OptiX RTN 910




A-239



Parameters


Call Waiting Time

(s)

1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting time

after the local station dials the number. If the calling station does not receive the

response message from the called station

within the call waiting time, it

automatically removes the

communication connection.

l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire

subnet, it is recommended that you set

this parameter to five seconds. If more

than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire

subnet, it is recommended that you set

this parameter to nine seconds.l The call waiting time should be set to the

same for all the NEs.

Dialling Mode Pulse

Dual-Tone

Frequency

Dual-Tone

Frequency

This parameter indicates the dialling mode

of the orderwire phone.

Conference Call - 888 l This parameter indicates the telephone

number of the network-wide orderwire

conference call.

l When a OptiX RTN 910 dials the

telephone number 888, the orderwire phones of all the NEs on the orderwire

subnet ring. When a OptiX RTN 910

receives the call, the orderwire phones on

the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the

orderwire point-to-multipoint group call

changes to a point-to-point call between

two NEs.

l The telephone number of the orderwire

conference call should be the same for all

the nodes on the same subnet.

l The telephone number of the orderwireconference call must have the same

length as the telephone number of the

orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local

site.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwire

phone number of the local station. An

addressing call refers to a point-to-point

call.

l The length of the orderwire phone

number of each NE should be the same.

It is recommended that you set the phone

number to a three-digit number.

l The orderwire phone number of each NE

should be unique. It is recommended that

the phone numbers are allocated from

101 for the NEs in a sequential order

according to the NE IDs.

l

The orderwire phone number cannot beset to the group call number 888 and

cannot start with 888.

Available

Orderwire Port

- - This parameter indicates the available port

for the orderwire phone.

Selected

Orderwire Port

- - This parameter indicates the selected port

for the orderwire phone.

A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_AdvancedThis topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Advanced tab.

Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones


Orderwire

Occupied Bytes

E1

E2

E1 l This parameter specifies the overhead

byte that is used to transmit the orderwire

signals.

l Regardless the parameter value, the radio

link always uses a customized overhead

byte to transmit the orderwire signals.

Hence, this parameter should be set

according to the occupied SDH overhead

bytes in the ordinary SDH.

OptiX RTN 910




A-241




This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >


2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.

Parameters


Available Data

Channel

- - l This parameter indicates the available F1

data channel.

l Two data channels should be selected for the configuration.

No. - - This parameter indicates the number of the

F1 data port.

Data Channel 1 - - l If an SDH optical or electrical line port is

selected, this parameter corresponds to

the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line

port.

l If an IF port is selected, this parameter

corresponds to the customized F1 byte in

the microwave frame at the IF port.l If F1 is selected, this parameter

corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the

SCC, Cross-Connect and Clock Board.

The F1/S1 interface complies with ITU-

T G.703 and operates at the rate of 64

kbit/s.

Data Channel 2


This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports


Overhead Byte SERIAL1 to

SERIAL4

SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical

line, the preset overhead byte is used totransmit the asynchronous data services.

l In the case of a radio link, a customized

serial overhead byte in the microwave

frame is used to transmit the

asynchronous data services.

Broadcast Data

Source

- No Data l When this parameter is set to the

SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the

corresponding SCC, Cross-Connect and

Clock Board is used.

l

When this parameter is set to the SDHoptical/electrical line port, the value of

Overhead Byte of this port is used.

l When this parameter is set to the IF port,

the customized Serial byte in the

microwave frame of this port is used.

Available

Broadcast Data

Sink

- - This parameter indicates the available

broadcast data sink.

Selected Broadcast

Data Sink

- - l When this parameter is set to the

SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the

corresponding SCC, Cross-Connect and

Clock Board is used.

l When this parameter is set to the SDH

optical/electrical line port, the value of

Overhead Byte of this port is used.

l When this parameter is set to the IF port,

the customized Serial byte in the

microwave frame of this port is used.


This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.

Navigation Path

Select the AUX logical board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface

from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 910




A-243



Parameters for the Basic Attributes


Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operation

object.

Relay Control

Mode

Auto Control

Manual Control

Auto Control l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the

alarming relay is started up

automatically. Otherwise, the alarming

relay is shut down.

l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major

Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in Critical

Alarm(K1) need to be set.

Relay Status in

Major Alarm(K0)

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of

the relay is set manually for major alarms.

l Enable: The relay is set to the "0N" status

for major alarms.

l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"

status for major alarms.

l This parameter is valid only when Relay

Control Mode is set to Manual

Control.

Relay Status in

Critical Alarm(K1)

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of

the relay is set manually for critical

alarms.

l Enable: The relay is set to the enabledstatus for critical alarms.

l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled

status for critical alarms.

l This parameter is valid only when Relay

Control Mode is set to Manual

Control.

Parameters for the Input Relay



object.

Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the channel.

Using Status Unused

Used

Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm

interface of the input relay is used.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/

High Level

Relay Turns On/Low Level

Relay Turns Off/

High Level

l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns

Off/High Level, an alarm is generated

when the relay is turned off.

l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns

On/Low Level, an alarm is generated

when the relay is turned on.

l This parameter is valid only when Using

Status is set to Used.

Alarm Severity Critical Alarm

Major Alarm

Minor Alarm

Warning Alarm

Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of the

alarm that is generated at the input relay.

Parameters for the Output Relay



object.

Output Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the output channel.

Use or Not Unused

Used

Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm

interface of the output relay is used.

Parameters for the Temperature Attributes



object.

Temperature

Upper Threshold

(Deg.C)

-40.0 to 80.0 - This parameter specifies the upper

temperature threshold of the board. When

the actual temperature is higher than the

preset value, an alarm is generated.

Temperature

Lower Threshold

(Deg.C)

-40.0 to 80.0 - This parameter specifies the lower

temperature threshold of the board. When

the actual temperature is lower than the

preset value, an alarm is generated.

OptiX RTN 910




A-245



Parameters for the Alarm Relay


Alarm Severity Critical Alarm

Major Alarm

Minor Alarm

Warning Alarm

Critical Alarm

Major Alarm

Minor Alarm

Warning Alarm

This parameter indicates the severity of the

alarm.

Alarm Output

Channel

CSK-1

CSK-2

CSK-3

CSK-4

CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of the

output alarm relay.

A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.


This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.

A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.

A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)

test.

A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.

A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of theODU.

A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of

the ODU.

A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the

ODU.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.

A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)

function.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.

A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.

A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave

interfaces.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave

interfaces.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave

interfaces.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.

Navigation Path


Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

l Click the IF Attributes tab.

Parameters



IF interface.

Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies the

ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a

radio link, this parameter is used to

prevent incorrect connections of radio

links between sites.

l Each radio link of an NE should have a

unique link ID, and the link IDs at both

ends of a radio link should be the same.

OptiX RTN 910




A-247




Received Radio

Link ID

1 to 4094 - l This parameter indicates the received ID

of the radio link.

l If the value of Received Radio Link IDdoes not match the preset value of Radio

Link ID at the local end, the local end

inserts the AIS signal to the downstream

direction of the service. At the same time,

the local end reports an alarm to the NMS,

indicating that the link IDs do not match.

IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback

Inloop

Outloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

loopback status of the IF interface.

l Non-Loopback indicates that the

loopback is cancelled or not performed.

l Inloop indicates that the IF signals

transmitted to the opposite end are looped

back.

l Outloop indicates that the received SDH

signals are looped back.

l Generally, this parameter is used to locate

the faults that occur at each IF interface.

The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If

this function is enabled, the services at the

related ports are affected. In normal

cases, this parameter is set to Non-

Loopback .

2M Wayside

Enable Statusa

Disabled

Enabled


whether the radio link transmits the

wayside E1 service.

l The wayside E1 service can be supported

by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,

128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK , or

9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.

2M Wayside Input

Boarda


slot in which the 2M wayside service is

accessed.

l This parameter can be set only when 2M

Wayside Enable Status is set to

Enabled.

l The wayside E1 service can be supported

by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,

128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK , or

9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




350 MHz

Consecutive Wave

Status

Stop

Start

Stop l This parameter indicates or specifies the

status of transmitting the 350 MHz carrier

signals at the IF interface.

l This parameter can be set to Start in the

commissioning process only. In normal

cases, this parameter is set to Stop.

Otherwise, the services are interrupted.

XPIC Enabled b Enabled

Disabled


whether the XPIC function of the IFX2

board is enabled.

l If the IFX2 board does not perform the

XPIC function, this parameter should be

set to Disabled. In this case, the XPIC

cable is required to perform self-loop for the XPIC port on the IFX2 board.

Enable IEEE-1588

Timeslotc

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with

the packet radio equipment, this parameter

should be set to Enabled. Otherwise, this

parameter should be set to Disabled.

NOTE

l

a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support the 2M wayside service.l b. The IFU2 and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.

l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.

Navigation Path


Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

Parameters



IF interface.

OptiX RTN 910




A-249




ATPC Enable

Status

Disabled

Enabled



l When this parameter is set to Enabledand if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB

higher or lower than the central value


the ATPC lower threshold at the receive

end, the receiver notifies the transmitter

to decrease or increase the transmit power















attributes.


-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lower


receive power.






Lower Threshold(dBm) to the






(dBm) is set to Disabled.

ATPC Lower

Threshold(dBm)

-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




ATPC Automatic

Threshold Enable

Status

Enabled

Disabled


ATPC automatic threshold function is

enabled.





link.




Threshold(dBm).

ATPC Upper

AutomaticThreshold(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates that the

equipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholds.

l This parameter is valid only when ATPC

Automatic Threshold Enable Status is

set to Enabled.

ATPC Lower

Automatic

Threshold(dBm)

- -


This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.

Navigation Path

In the NE Explorer, select a Hybrid IF board from the Object Tree and then choose

Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.

Parameters



IF port.

IF Channel

Bandwidth

7M

14M

28M

56M

7M IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the

channel spacing of the corresponding radio

link. This parameter is set according to the


OptiX RTN 910




A-251




AM Enable Status Disable

Enable

Disable l When this parameter is set to Disable, the

radio link uses only the specified



Modulation Mode.

l When this parameter is set to Enable, the

radio link uses the corresponding


channel conditions.





enabled.

Modulation Mode

of the Guaranteed

AM Capacity

QPSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gain





service transmission bandwidth that the

Hybrid radio must ensure and the




Enable Status is set to Enable.Modulation Mode

of the Full AM

Capacity

QPSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM














Enable Status is set to Enable.

Manually

Specified

Modulation Mode

QPSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM



transmission.


Enable Status is set to Disable.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Guaranteed E1

Capacity

- - l When AM Enable Status is set to

Enable, this parameter depends on IF

Channel Bandwidth and Modulation

Mode of the Guaranteed AM

Capacity and is not configurable.

l When AM Enable Status is set to

Disable, this parameter depends on IF

Channel Bandwidth and Manually

Specified Modulation Mode and is not

configurable.

E1 Capacity - - This parameter specifies the number of E1

services that can be transmitted in the

Hybrid work mode. The value of this

parameter cannot exceed the GuaranteedE1 Capacity.



A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.

Navigation Path

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.

Parameters


Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the

ATPC adjustment.

Event NO. - - This parameter indicates the number of theATPC adjustment event.

Adjustment Time - - This parameter indicates the time of the

ATPC adjustment.

Adjustment

Direction

- - This parameter indicates the direction of the

adjustment at the port.

Switchover - - This parameter indicates the switching

operation at the port.

Transmitted

Power(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the transmitted

power of the port to be switched.

OptiX RTN 910




A-253




Received Power

(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the received power

of the port to be switched.

A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)

test.

Navigation Path


Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.

Parameters


Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the

PRBS test.

Direction Cross

Tributary

Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies the

direction of the PRBS test.

l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test

is performed to check the connectivity of

the cable from the tributary board to theDDF.

l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS

test is performed to check the processing

of the service from the tributary board to

the NE at the remote end.

Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the

duration of the PRBS test.

Measured Time s

10min

h

s This parameter indicates or specifies the

time unit used for the PRBS test.

Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of the

PRBS test.

Progress - - This parameter indicates the progress

percentage of the PRBS test.

Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of bit

errors that occur in the PRBS test.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Accumulating

Mode

Selected

Deselected

Deselected This parameter specifies whether to display

the values in accumulative mode. If

Accumulating Mode is selected, it

indicates that the values are displayed in

accumulative mode.

A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio FrequencyAttribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.

Navigation Pathl Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU

Interface from the Function Tree.

l Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.

Parameters


Board - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

ODU.

Transmit

Frequency(MHz)


transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,

the central frequency of the channel.


less than the sum of the minimum

transmit frequency supported by the

ODU and a half of the channel spacing,

and must not be more than the difference

between the maximum transmit

frequency supported by the ODU and a

half of the channel spacing.

l The difference between the transmit

frequencies at both ends of a radio link

should be one T/R spacing.



OptiX RTN 910




A-255




T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

spacing between the transmit frequency

and receive frequency of the ODU to

prevent mutual interference of the

transmitter and receiver.

l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the


higher than the receive frequency. If the

ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit

frequency is one T/R spacing lower than

the receive frequency.


spacing, this parameter is set to 0,


by the ODU is used.







radio link.

Actual Transmit

Frequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

frequency of the ODU.

Actual Receive

Frequency(MHz)


frequency of the ODU.

Actual T/R

Spacing(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual T/R

spacing of the ODU.

The Range of

frequency Point

(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the working range

of the frequency of the ODU.

A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the

ODU.

Navigation Path

l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU


l Click the Power Attributes tab.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters



ODU.

Maximum

Transmit Power

(dBm)






modulation module..




l

The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not

exceed this value.



Transmit Power

(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the transmit

power of the ODU. This parameter

cannot be set to a value that exceeds the

nominal power rang of the ODU or a

value that exceeds Maximum Transmit

Power(dBm).

l The transmit power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a

radio link.








OptiX RTN 910




A-257




Power to Be

Received(dBm)



used in the antenna alignment stage. After

this parameter is set, the NE


















TX High

Threshold(dBm)

- - l If the value of the actual transmit power


value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the

system separately records the durationwhen the value of the actual transmit

power of the ODU is greater than the

preset value of TX High Threshold

(dBm) and the duration when the value

of the actual transmit power of the ODU

is greater than the preset value of TX Low

Threshold(dBm) in the performance

events.



value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and

is lower than the preset value of TX HighThreshold(dBm), the system records the


transmit power of the ODU is greater than

the preset value of TX Low Threshold



of the ODU is lower than the preset value

of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system

does not record it.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




TX Low Threshold

(dBm)

- - l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low

Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the


OptiX RTN 910




A-259




RX High

Threshold(dBm)

- - l If the value of the actual receive power of

the ODU is lower than the preset value of

RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system

records the duration when the value of the

actual receive power of the ODU is lower

than the preset value of RX Low

Threshold(dBm) and duration when the

value of the actual transmit power of the

ODU is lower than the preset value of RX

High Threshold(dBm)in the

performance events.



of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is

lower than the preset value of RX HighThreshold(dBm), the system records the


receive power of the ODU is Lower than

the preset value of RX High Threshold




of RX High Threshold(dBm), the

system does not record it.

Actual Transmit

Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates the actual


l If the ATPC function is enabled, the

queried actual transmit power may be

different from the preset value.

Actual Received

Power(dBm)


power of the ODU.

Actual range of

Power(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the range of the

actual transmit power of the ODU.

Equip Information




Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.

l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission

capacity only and is irrelevant to the type



OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Station Type Tx Low

Tx High

- l This parameter indicates whether the


station.





serial number and the manufacturer code of

the ODU.

Transmission

Power Type

Standard Power

Output

High Power Output

- This parameter indicates the level of the


A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_EquipmentInformation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of

the ODU.

Navigation Path

l

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.

l Click the Equipment Information tab.

Parameters



ODU.



Equipment Type PDH

SDH

- l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.

l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission

capacity only and is irrelevant to the type


T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of

the ODU.

OptiX RTN 910




A-261




Intermediate

Frequency

Bandwidth (MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the IF frequency

bandwidth of the ODU.

Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the


station.




Transmission

Power Type

- - This parameter indicates the level of the


Produce Time - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing

time of the ODU.


serial number and the manufacturer code of

the ODU.

A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the

ODU.

Navigation Path

l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU


l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameters


Board - - This parameter indicates the correspondingODU.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




RF Loopback Non-Loopback

Inloop


loopback status of the RF interface of the

ODU.


loopback is canceled or not performed.

l Inloop indicates that the RF signals


back.

l This function is used for fault locating for

the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback

function is used for diagnosis and may

affect the services that are transmitted

over the interfaces. Hence, exercise

precaution before starting this function.l In normal cases, this parameter is set to

Non-Loopback .

Configure

Transmission

Status

unmute

mute

unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the


l If this parameter is set to mute, the

transmitter of the ODU does not work but


l If this parameter is set to unmute, the

ODU can normally transmit and receive

microwave signals.


unmute.

Actual

Transmission

Status

unmute

mute

- This parameter indicates the actual transmit

status of the ODU.

Factory

Information

- - This parameter indicates the manufacturer

information about the ODU.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.

Navigation Path


Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

l Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.

OptiX RTN 910




A-263



Parameters



SDH interface.

Optical Interface

Namea

- - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the optical interface.

Laser Switcha Open

Close

Open l This parameter indicates or specifies the

on/off state of the laser.

l This parameter is set for SDH optical

interfaces only.


Open.

Optical(Electrical)Interface

Loopback a

Non-Loopback

Inloop

Outloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status on the SDH interface.



l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals


back.

l Outloop indicates that the received SDH



the SDH interfaces. The Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback



over the interfaces. Hence, exercise

precaution before starting this function.


Non-Loopback .


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




VC4 Loopback b Non-Loopback

Inloop

Outloop


loopback status in the VC-4 path.

l Non-Loopback indicates that theloopback is canceled or not performed.

l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals


back.

l Outloop indicates that the received VC-4



the VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopback



over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function.


Non-Loopback .

NOTE

l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.

l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.

A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)

function.

Navigation Path


Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.

Parameters


Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

optical interface.

OptiX RTN 910




A-265




Automatic

Shutdown

Disabled

Enabled


whether the Automatic Laser

Shutdown function is enabled or

disabled for the laser.

l The ALS function allows the laser to shut

down automatically when an optical port

does not carry services, an optical fiber is

broken, or no optical signal is received.

l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period

(ms), and Continuously On-test Period

(ms) only when this parameter is set to

Enabled.

On Period(ms) 1000 to 3000 2000 This parameter indicates or specifies the

period when a shutdown laser automaticallystarts up and tests whether the optical fiber

is normal.

Off Period(ms) 2000 to 300000 60000 This parameter indicates or specifies the

period when the laser does not work (with

the ALS function being enabled).

Continuously On-

test Period(ms)

2000 to 300000 90000 This parameter indicates or specifies the

period when a shutdown laser is manually

started up and tests whether the optical fiber

is normal.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.

Navigation Path


Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.

l Select By Board/Port(Channel).

l Select Port from the list box.

Parameters



port.

Port Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the port.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Tributary

Loopback

Non-Loopback

Inloop

Outloop


loopback status in the associated path of

the tributary unit.



l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals


back.

l Outloop indicates that the received PDH



the paths of the tributary unit. The

Tributary Loopback function is used for

diagnosis and may affect the services thatare transmitted over the interfaces.

Hence, exercise precaution before

starting this function.


Non-Loopback .

Port Impedance - - This parameter indicates the impedance of a

path, which depends on the tributary unit.

Service Load

Indication

Load

Non-Loaded

Load l This parameter indicates or specifies the

service loading status in a specific path.

l When this parameter is set to Load, the board detects whether alarms exist in the

path.


Loaded, the board does not detect

whether there are alarms in the path.

l If a path does not carry any services, you

can set this parameter to Non-Loaded for

the path to mask all the alarms. If a path

carries services, you need to set this

parameter to Load for the path.

OptiX RTN 910




A-267




Retiming Mode Normal

Retiming Mode of

Tributary Clock Retiming Mode of

Cross-Connect

Clock

Normal l This parameter indicates or specifies the

retiming mode of a specific path.

l By using the retiming function, theretiming reference signal from the SDH

network and the service data signal are

combined and then sent to the client

equipment, thus decreasing the output

jitter in the signal. In this way, the

retiming function ensures that the service

code flow can normally transfer the

retiming reference signal.

l When this parameter is set to Normal, the

retiming function is not used.

l

When this parameter is set to RetimingMode of Tributary Clock , the retiming

function is used with the clock of the

upstream tributary unit traced.

l When this parameter is set to the

retiming function is used with the clock

of the upstream tributary unit traced.,

the retiming function is used with the

clock of the cross-connect unit traced.

l It is recommended that the external clock,

instead of the retiming function, should

be used to provide reference clock signals

for the equipment.

l If the retiming function is required, it is

recommended that you set this parameter

to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect

Clock .

Port Service Type - - This parameter indicates the type of services

that are processed in a path. It depends on

the services that are transmitted in a path.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.

Navigation Path


Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the General Attributes tab.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






the port name.

Name - - This parameter specifies

the port name.

Enable Port Enabled

Disabled

Enabled This parameter indicates

the working mode of the

port.

Encapsulation Type Null

802.1Q

QinQ

- l This parameter

specifies the method of

the port to process the

received packets.

l If you set this

parameter to Null, the

port transparently

transmits the received

packets.

l If you set this

parameter to 802.1Q,

the port identifies the

packets that comply

with the IEEE 802.1q

standard.

l If you set this

parameter to QinQ, the

port identifies the

packets that comply

with the IEEE 802.1ad

QinQ standard.

OptiX RTN 910




A-269




Working Mode Auto-Negotiation

10M Half-Duplex

10M Full-Duplex

100M Half-Duplex

100M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of

different types support

different working

modes.

l When the equipment on

the opposite side works

in auto-negotiation

mode, set the working

mode of the equipment

on the local side to

Auto-Negotiation.



in full-duplex mode, set

the working mode of


local side to 10M Full-

Duplex, 100M Full-

Duplex, or 1000M

Full-Duplex

depending on the port

rate of the equipment

on the opposite side.



in half-duplex mode,set the working mode

of the equipment on the

local side to 10M Half-

Duplex, 100M Half-

Duplex, or Auto-

Negotiation depending

on the port rate of the

equipment on the

opposite side.

l The GE optical

interface supports the

1000M full-duplex

mode only.

Max Frame Length

(byte)

1518 to 9600 1522 The value of this

parameter should be

greater than the length of

any frame to be

transported.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Auto-Negotiation

Enable

Auto-Negotiation

10M Half-Duplex

10M Full-Duplex

100M Half-Duplex

100M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

100M Full-Duplex l This parameter

specifies the auto-

negotiation capability

of the Ethernet port.


only when Working

Mode is set to Auto-

Negotiation.

Logical Port Attribute Optical Port

Electrical Port

Optical Port l This parameter

specifies the attribute

of the logical port.

l The SFP on the EM6F

board supports the

optical port andelectrical port.

Physical Port Attribute - - This parameter indicates

the attribute of the

physical port.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Flow Control tab.



Port - - This parameter indicatesthe port name.

OptiX RTN 910




A-271




Non-Autonegotiation

Flow Control Mode

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled l This parameter is valid

only when Working

Mode is not set to

Auto-Negotiation.

l The non-

autonegotiation flow

control mode of the

equipment on the local

side must be consistent

with the non-

autonegotiation flow

control mode of the

equipment on the

opposite side

Auto-Negotiation Flow

Control Mode

Disabled

Enable Symmetric Flow

Control

Disabled l This parameter is valid

only when Working

Mode is set to Auto-

Negotiation.

l The auto-negotiation

flow control mode of


local side must be

consistent with the

auto-negotiation flow

control mode of the

equipment on theopposite side

A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.




the port name.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




QinQ Type Domain - - l This parameter

specifies the QinQ type

domain.

l When Encapsulation

Type in the General

Attributes tab page is

set to QinQ, you need

to set QinQ Type

Domain. The default

value is 88A8.

l When Encapsulation

Type in the General

Attributes tab page is

set to Null or 802.1Q,

you cannot set QinQ

Type Domain. In this

case, QinQ Type

Domain is displayed as

FFFF and cannot be

changed.

l QinQ Type Domain

should be set to the

same value for all the

ports on the EM6T/

EM6F boardor the

EM4T/EM4F logical board.

OptiX RTN 910




A-273




TAG Tag Aware

Access

Hybrid

Tag Aware l This parameter

specifies the TAG flag

of a port. For details

about the TAG flags

and associated frame-

processing methods,

see Table A-1.

l If all the accessed

services are frames

with the VLAN tag

(tagged frames), this

parameter is set to Tag

Aware.

l If all the accessed

services are frames

without the VLAN tag

(untagged frames), this

parameter is set to

Access.

l If the accessed services

contain tagged frames

and untagged frames,


Hybrid.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l

This parameter is validonly when TAG is set

to Access or Hybrid.

l For details about the

functions of this

parameter, see Table

A-1.



situations.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is valid

only when TAG is set

to Access or Hybrid.

l For details about the

functions of this

parameter, see Table

A-1.

l When the VLAN

priority is required to

divide streams or to be

used for other

purposes, this

parameter is set

according to the


In normal cases, it is



Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames

Port Type of DataFrame

Processing Method

Tag Aware Access Hybrid

Ingress UNI Tagged frame The port receives the

frame.

The port discards

the frame.

The port receives

the frame.

Untagged frame The port discards the

frame.

The ports add the

VLAN tag, to which

Default VLAN ID

and VLAN

Priority

correspond, to the

frame and receives

the frame.

The ports add the

VLAN tag, to which

Default VLAN ID

and VLAN

Priority

correspond, to the

frame and receives

the frame.

OptiX RTN 910




A-275



Port Type of DataFrame

Processing Method


Egress UNI Tagged frame The port transmits

the frame.

The port strips the

VLAN tag from theframe and then

transmits the frame.

l If the VLAN ID

in the frame isDefault VLAN

ID, the port strips

the VLAN tag

from the frame

and then

transmits the

frame.

l If the VLAN ID

in the frame is not

Default VLAN

ID, the portdirectly transmits

the frame.

A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_AdvancedAttributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

Navigation Path



2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.




the port name.

Port Physical

Parameters


the physical parameters of

the port.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




MAC Loopback Non-Loopback

Inloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter

specifies the loopback

state at the MAC layer.

When this parameter is

set to Inloop, the

Ethernet signals

transmitted to the

opposite end are looped

back.

l In normal cases, it is



PHY Loopback Non-Loopback

Inloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter

specifies the loopback state at the PHY layer.

When this parameter is

set to Inloop, the

Ethernet physical

signals transmitted to

the opposite end are

looped back.

l In normal cases, it is



Loopback Check - - This parameter specifieswhether to enable loop

detection, which is used to

check whether a loop

exists on the port.

Loopback Port

Shutdown


whether to enable the loop

port shutdown function.

Egress PIR Bandwidth

(kbit/s)


the egress PIR bandwidth.

Enabling BroadcastPacket Suppression

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled This parameter specifieswhether to limit the traffic

rate of the broadcast

packets according to the

proportion of the

broadcast packets in the

total packets. When the

equipment at the opposite

end may encounter a

broadcast storm, this

parameter is set to

Enabled.

OptiX RTN 910




A-277




Broadcast Packet

Suppression Threshold

0 to 100 30 When the proportion of

the broadcast packets in

the total packets exceeds

the value of this

parameter, the received

broadcast packets are

discarded. The value of

this parameter should be

more than the proportion

of the broadcast packets in

the total packets before

the broadcast storm

occurs. In normal cases,


30% or higher.

A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_BasicAttributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave

interfaces.

Navigation Path


Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.

Parameters



IF port.

Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies thecustomized port name.

Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 This parameter indicates the working mode

of the Ethernet name.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Encapsulation

Type

Null

802.1Q

QinQ

802.1Q l This parameter specifies the method of

the port to process the received packets.

l If this parameter is set to Null, the porttransparently transmits the received

packets.

l If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port

identifies the packets that comply with

the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

l If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port

identifies the packets that comply with

the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard.

A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave

interfaces.

Navigation Path


Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes



IF port.

QinQ Type

Domain

- - l This parameter specifies the QinQ type

domain.

l This parameter can be set only when

Encapsulation Type in GeneralAttributes is set to QinQ.

OptiX RTN 910




A-279




Tag Tag Aware

Access

Hybrid

Tag Aware l This parameter specifies the TAG flag of

a port. For details about the TAG flags

and associated frame-processing

methods, see Table A-2.

l If all the accessed services are frames that

contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames),

set this parameter to "Tag Aware".

l If all the accessed services are frames that

do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged

frames), set this parameter to "Access".

l If the accessed services contain tagged

frames and untagged frames, set this

parameter to "Hybrid".

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter is valid only when TAG

is set to Access or Hybrid.

l For details about the functions of this

parameter, see Table A-2.


to the actual situations.

VLAN Priority 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0 l This parameter is valid only when TAG

is set to Access or Hybrid.

l For details about the functions of this

parameter, see Table A-2.

l When the VLAN priority is required to

divide streams or to be used for other

purposes, this parameter needs to be set

according to the planning information. In

normal cases, it is recommended that you


Table A-2 Data frame processing

Status Type of DataFrame Processing MethodTag Aware Access Hybrid

Ingress Port Tagged frame The port receives the

frame.

The port discards

the frame.

The port receives

the frame.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Status Type of DataFrame

Processing Method


Untagged frame The port discards the

frame.

The port receives

the frame after theVLAN tag that

corresponds to

"Default VLAN ID"

and "VLAN

Priority" are added

to the frame.

The port receives

the frame after theVLAN tag that

corresponds to

"Default VLAN ID"

and "VLAN

Priority" are added

to the frame.

Egress Port Tagged frame The port transmits

the frame.

The port strips the

VLAN tag from the

frame and then

transmits the frame.

l If the VLAN ID

in the frame is

"Default VLAN

ID", the port

strips the VLANtag from the

frame and then

transmits the

frame.

l If the VLAN ID

in the frame is not

"Default VLAN

ID", the port

directly transmits

the frame.

A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_AdvancedAttributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave

interfaces.

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >InterfaceManagement > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameters for Advanced Attributes



IF port.

OptiX RTN 910




A-281




Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the

radio link. As the identifier of a radio link,

this parameter is used to prevent incorrect

connections of radio links between sites.

l The ID of each radio link of an NE must

be unique, and the link IDs at both ends

of a radio link must be the same.

Received Radio

Link ID

- - l This parameter indicates the received ID

of the radio link.

l If the value of Received Radio Link ID

does not match with the preset value of

Radio Link ID at the local end, the local

end inserts the AIS signal to the

downstream direction of the service. Atthe same time, the local end reports an

alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link

IDs do not match.

IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback

Inloop

Outloop


loopback status of the IF interface.



l Inloop indicates that the IF signals


back.l Outloop indicates that the received SDH


l Generally, this parameter is used to locate

the faults that occur at each IF interface.

The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If

this function is enabled, the services at the

related ports are affected. In normal

cases, this parameter is set to Non-

Loopback .

Composite Port

Loopback

Non-Loopback

Inloop

Outloop


loopback status on the compositeinterface.



l Inloop indicates that the composite

signals transmitted to the opposite end are

looped back.

l Outloop indicates that the received

composite signals are looped back.


Non-Loopback .


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)




Error Frame

Discard Enabled

Enabled

Disabled


whether to discard the Ethernet frame

when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet

frame.

l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the

IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video

service, you can set this parameter to

Disabled.

l The IF1 board does not support this

parameter.

MAC Address - - l This parameter indicates the MAC

address of the port.


parameter.

Transmitting Rate

(Kbit/s)

- - l This parameter indicates the transmit rate

of the local port.


parameter.

Receiving Rate

(Kbit/s)

- - l This parameter indicates the receive rate

of the local port.


parameter.

MAC Loopback Non-Loopback

Inloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopback

state at the MAC layer. When this

parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet

signals transmitted to the opposite end are

looped back.


you use the default value.


parameter.

PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback The IF port on the OptiX RTN 910 does not

support the setting of this parameter.

A.15 Parameters for Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads

(RSOHs).


OptiX RTN 910




A-283



This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).




This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads

(RSOHs).

Navigation Path

1. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead

Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.

2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.

Parameters for Setting the Display Format


Display in Text

Format

Selected

Deselected

Selected This parameter specifies the display in the

text format.

Display in

Hexadecimal

Selected

Deselected

Deselected This parameter specifies the display in the

hexadecimal format.



Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.

J0 to be Sent

([Mode]Content)

- [16 Bytes]HuaWei

SBS

If the NE at the opposite end reports the

J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set

according to the J0 byte to be received at the

opposite end.

J0 to be Received

([Mode]Content)

- [Disabled] l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be

received.

l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the

board does not monitor the received J0

byte.


default value.




OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Navigation Path

1. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.




Display in Text

Format

Selected

Deselected


text format.

Display in

Hexadecimal

Selected

Deselected


hexadecimal format.

Parameters for the Trace Byte J1



J1 to be Sent

([Mode]Content)

- [16 Bytes]HuaWei

SBS


LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, this

parameter is set according to the J1 byte to

be received at the opposite end.

J1 to be Received

([Mode]Content)

- [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the


byte.


default value.

Parameters for the Signal Flag C2

Parameter Value Range Default Value DescriptionObject - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.

C2 to be Sent - (0x00)Unequipped If the NE at the opposite end reports the

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set

according to the C2 byte to be received at the

opposite end.

C2 to be Received - (0x00)Unequipped If the NE at the local end reports the

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set

according to the C2 byte to be sent at the

opposite end.

OptiX RTN 910




A-285



Parameters for Overhead Termination



VC4 Overhead

Termination

Termination

Pass-Through

Auto

Auto l If this parameter is set to Pass-Through,

the NE forwards the original overhead

after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead

regardless of the C2 byte.

l If this parameter is set to Termination,

the NE generates the new VC-4 path

overhead according to the board setting

after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead

regardless of the C2 byte.

l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4

path overhead in the VC-4 pass-throughservice is passed through, and the VC-4

path overhead in the VC-12 service is

terminated.

l It is recommended that you use the default

value.



Navigation Path


Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function

Tree.




Display in Text

Format

Selected

Deselected


text format.

Display in

Hexadecimal

Selected

Deselected


hexadecimal format.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Parameters for the Trace Byte



J2 to be Sent - [16 Bytes]HuaWei

SBS


HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set

according to the J2 byte to be received by

the NE at the opposite end.

J2 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the


byte.


default value.

J2 Received - - This parameter displays the J2 byte that isactually received.

Parameters for the Signal Flag



Signal Label

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to

be Sent

- - If the NE at the opposite end reports the

LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this

parameter is set according to the V5 byte to

be received at the opposite end.

Signal Label

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to

be Received

- - If the NE at the local end reports the

LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this

parameter is set according to the V5 byte to

be sent at the opposite end.

Signal Label

(L1,L2,L3 of V5)

Received

- - This parameter displays the V5 byte that is

actually received.

OptiX RTN 910




A-287





B Board Loopback Types

Different service interface boards support different loopback types.

Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards

Board Loopback Type Remarks

SL1D l Supports the optical

interface inloop

l Supports the optical

interface outloop

l Supports the VC-4 path

inloop

l Supports the VC-4 pathoutloop

The SL1D boards described in

this topic include the physical

SL1D board and the logical

SL1D board that the physical

CSTA/CSHC board maps.

SP3S and SP3D l Supports the tributary

inloop

l Supports the tributary

outloop

The SP3S and SP3D boards

described in this topic include

the physical SP3S and SP3D

boards and the logical SP3S and

SP3D boards that the physical

CSTA, CSHA, CHSB, and

CHSC boards map.

EM4T and EM4F

EM6T and EM6F

l Supports the Ethernet port

inloop at the MAC layer l Supports the Ethernet port

inloop at the PHY layer

The EM4T/EM4F is the logical

Ethernet board mapping the physical Ethernet board CSHA/

CSHB/CSHC.

IF1 l Supports the IF port inloop

l Supports the IF port outloop

l Supports the composite port

inloop


outloop

-

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description B Board Loopback Types



B-1



Board Loopback Type Remarks

IFU2 l Supports the IF port inloop



inloop


outloop

l Supports the MAC inloop at

IF_ETH ports

-

IFX2 l Supports the IF port inloop



inloopl Supports the composite port

outloop

l Supports the MAC inloop at

IF_ETH ports

-

B Board Loopback Types

OptiX RTN 910


B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



C Indicators, Weight, and Power

Consumption of Boards

Indicators of Boards

Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA







board.









BIOS boot state.

On (green) The upper layer software is beinginitialized.





fails.

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards



C-1














On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs on the board.


system.










Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB







board.





C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards

OptiX RTN 910


C-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)








BIOS boot state.


initialized.





fails.












board.


system.


Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC







board.





OptiX RTN 910




C-3








BIOS boot state.


initialized.





fails.












board.


system.















OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)






Off The second optical interface on the linedoes not report the R_LOS alarm.

Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1



normally.





to the board.




service.




configured.





added on the NMS


major alarms.







OptiX RTN 910




C-5






Off The equipment at theopposite end does not report

an RDI.



system.


activated in the

unprotected system.


state in the 1+1 protectionsystem.



Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2



normally.





to the board.







configured.





OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





added on the NMS

l The ODU has critical or major alarms.











an RDI.



system.


activated in the

unprotected system.

Off l The board is in the standbystate in the 1+1 protection

system.



Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F






l There is no power supplied to the board.


On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

OptiX RTN 910




C-7




On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.


PROG On for 100 ms (green) and off




On for 300 ms (green) and off



being reset, the board software is in BIOS

boot state.

On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.

On for 100 ms (red) and off for

100 ms repeatedly



fails.

On (red) When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the memory self-check fails or

loading the upper layer software fails.

When the board is running, the logic file or

upper layer software is lost.





Blinking (yellow) The GE1 interface is receiving or

transmitting data.





Flashing (green) The GE2 interface is receiving or

transmitting data.

Off The GE2 interface is not connected or isconnected incorrectly.

NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the

corresponding GE optical interfaces.


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D



normally.





to the board.







configured.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface of

the SL1D reports the R_LOS

alarm.

Off The first optical interface of the SL1D does not report the

R_LOS alarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface

of the SL1D reports the

R_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical interface

of the SL1D does not report

the R_LOS alarm.

Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D



normally.


OptiX RTN 910




C-9







to the board.




service.




configured.

Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX







board.



board.


system.


Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators

Indicator Status Description

PWRA On (green) The power supply is connected.




OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)





Boards Weight (kg) Power consumption (W)

Empty chassis

(with only the

backplane)

2.36 kg -


OptiX RTN 910




Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



D Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

Number

1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/

1.75 in.)

1+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of one working channel and one

protection channel. Two ODUs and two IF boards are used at each end of

a radio link.

A

Adaptive

modulation

A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode

based on the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the

equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the

transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When

the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency

modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link

that carries high-priority services.

Add/Drop

multiplexer

A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal

to/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network.

Adjacent

channelalternate

polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a

horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmittwo signals.

Automatic

transmit power

control

A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit

signal detected at the receiver.

C

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description D Glossary



D-1



Co-channel

dual

polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization

wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The co-

channel dual polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single

polarization.

Cross

polarization

interference

cancellation

A technology used in the case of the co-channel dual polarization (CCDP)

to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization

waves in the CCDP.

D

DC-I A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-

circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet

and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

Digital

modulation

A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and

frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal.

In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.

Dual-polarized

antenna

An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent

radio waves orthogonally polarized.

E

Equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can

compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency

selective fading.

Bit error A symptom that the quality of the transmitted information is degraded

because some bits of a data stream are errored after being received,

decided, and regenerated.

F

Forward error

correction

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to

the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the

bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.

Frequency

diversity

A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with

a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal

and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact

of fading.

G

D Glossary

OptiX RTN 910


D-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



Gateway

network

element

A network element that is used for communication between the NE

application layer and the NM application layer.

H

Hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid

radio supports the AM function.

I

Indoor Unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements

accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Internet Group

Management

Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast

groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent

multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.

Intermediate

frequency

The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal

and an RF signal.

IGMP

snooping

A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This

protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and

analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between

hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data

on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

L

Layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet

switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address.

Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data

forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located

on the NE management layer of the transport network.

Link

aggregation

group

An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to

form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link

aggregation group as if it were a single link.

Trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the

input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the

integrality of the transferred signals.

M

Multiplex

section

protection

The function performed to provide capability for switching a signal

between and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a

"protection" channel.

OptiX RTN 910




D-3



Multiple

Spanning Tree

Protocol

MSTP is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol and the Rapid

Spanning Tree Protocol, and was introduced in IEEE 802.1s as amendment

to 802.1Q, 1998 edition. Standard IEEE 802.1Q-2003 now includes

MSTP.

N

N+1 protection A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels and

one protection channel.

Network

element

A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software

running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board

which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software

runs on the system control Unit.

Network

managementsystem

The network management system in charge of the operation,

administration, and maintenance of a network.

Non-gateway

network

element

A network element whose communication with the NM application layer

must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.

O

Orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation

engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.

Outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements

frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.

P

Plesiochronous

Digital

Hierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes

the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565

Mbit/s rates.

Polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector

is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the

electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this

electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric

field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon,

this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of

the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this

electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

Q

D Glossary

OptiX RTN 910


D-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It

encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN)

into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to

travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer

2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.

R

Rapid

Spanning Tree

Protocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning

tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward

compatible with the STP protocol.

S

Singlepolarized

antenna

An antenna that can transmit only one channel of polarized electromagneticwaves.

Space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a

specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then

performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently,

only receive SD is used.

Spanning Tree

Protocol

An algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.1D. It configures the active topology

of a Bridged LAN of arbitrary topology into a single spanning tree.

Subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of

network management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.

Subnetwork

connection

protection

A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced

by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork

connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.

Synchronous

Digital

Hierarchy

A hierarchical set of synchronous digital transport, multiplexing, and

cross-connect structures, which is standardized for the transport of suitably

adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.

U

U2000 A unified network management system developed by Huawei. It can

support all the NE level and network level management functions, and can

manage the transport network, access network, and MAN Ethernet in a

unified manner.

V

Virtual LAN An end-to-end logical network that can travel through several network

segments or networks by using the network management software based

on the switch LAN. The IEEE 802.1Q is the main standard for the virtual

LAN.

OptiX RTN 910




D-5





E Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order.

A

ADC Analog Digit Converter

AGC Automatic Gain Control

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ARP Address Resolution Protocol

ASK Amplitude Shift Keying

ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control

AU Administrative Unit

B

BER Bit Error Rate

BIOS Basic Input Output System

BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity

BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit

BSC Base Station Controller

C

CAR Committed Access Rate

CBS Committed Burst Size

CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization

CF Compact Flash card

CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol

OptiX RTN 910

IDU Hardware Description E Acronyms and Abbreviations



E-1



CIR Committed Information Rate

CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree

CoS Class of Service

CPU Central Processing Unit

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CVLAN Customer VLAN

C-VLAN Customer VLAN

D

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communications Channel

DCN Data Communication Network

DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point

DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel

E-LAN Ethernet-LAN

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMI Electromagnetic Interference

ERPS Ethernet Ring Protection Switching

ES-IS End System to Intermediate System

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

F

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FD Frequency Diversity

FE Fast Ethernet

FEC Forward Error Correction

FIFO First In First Out

FLP Fast Link Pulse

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array


OptiX RTN 910


E-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



FTP File Transfer Protocol

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

GTS Generic Traffic Shaping

GUI Graphical User Interface

H

HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code 3

HDLC High level Data Link Control procedure

HSB Hot Standby

HSM Hitless Switch Mode

I

ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol

IDU Indoor Unit

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force

IF Intermediate Frequency

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

IP Internet Protocol

IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6

IS-IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System

ISO International Standard Organization

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication

Standardization Sector

IVL Independence VLAN learning

L

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel

OptiX RTN 910




E-3



LAG Link Aggregation Group

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

LB LoopBack

LCT Generation-Local Craft Terminal

LDPC Low-Density Parity Check code

LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection

LPT Link State Pass Through

M

MA Maintenance Association

MAC Medium Access Control

MADM Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer

MBS Maximum Burst Size

MD Maintenance Domain

MDI Medium Dependent Interface

MEP Maintenance End Point

MIB Management Information Base

MP Maintenance Point

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTBF Mean Time Between Failure

MTTR Mean Time To Repair

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

N

NE Network Element

NLP Normal Link Pulse

NMS Network Management System

NNI Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface

NSAP Network Service Access Point

O


OptiX RTN 910


E-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 05 (2010-05-30)



OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance

ODU Outdoor Unit

OSI Open Systems Interconnection

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

P

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode

PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode

PIR Peak Information Rate

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence

Q

QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q

QoS Quality of Service

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

R

RF Radio Frequency

RFC Request For Comment

RIP Routing Information Protocol

RMON Remote Monitoring

RNC Radio Network Controller

RS Reed-Solomon encoding

RSL Received Signal Level

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RTN Radio Transmission Node

S

SD Space Diversity

OptiX RTN 910




E-5



SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable

SNC SubNetwork Connection

SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio

SP Strict Priority

SSM Synchronization Status Message

STM Synchronous Transport Module

STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1

STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface


OptiX RTN 910


Date post:	03-Jun-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	cepillo
View:	248 times
Download:	8 times

RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_05)

Documents